Page 1 ® R&S ZNB/ZNBT Vector Network Analyzers User Manual (;×éÍ2) 1173916302 Version 55...
Page 2 Subject to change – data without tolerance limits is not binding. ® R&S is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG. Trade names are trademarks of the owners. ® 1173.9163.02 | Version 55 | R&S ZNB/ZNBT ® Throughout this manual, R&S is abbreviated as R&S.
Page 3 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT Contents 1 Preface....................13 Documentation Overview................... 13 1.1.1 Getting Started Manual....................13 1.1.2 User Manual and Help....................13 1.1.3 Service Manual......................13 1.1.4 Instrument Security Procedures..................14 1.1.5 Basic Safety Instructions....................14 1.1.6 Data Sheets and Brochures..................14 1.1.7...
Page 4 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour......................32 4.2.1 Front Panel R&S ZNB....................32 4.2.2 Front Panel R&S ZNBT....................38 4.2.3 Rear Panel R&S ZNB....................40 4.2.4 Rear Panel R&S ZNBT....................43 Operating the Instrument................... 45 4.3.1 Manual Operation ......................45 4.3.2 Control Elements of the Application Window..............50 4.3.3...
Page 5 Eazy De-embedding Based on IEEE 370..............228 5.7.9 In-situ De-Embedding....................230 5.7.10 Smart Fixture De-Embedding..................230 5.7.11 Delta-L 4.0 PCB Characterization................230 5.7.12 Bias Tees (R&S ZNB only)..................231 5.7.13 Internal Second Source....................232 5.7.14 Precision Frequency Reference..................232 User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 6 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 5.7.15 GPIB Interface......................232 5.7.16 Device Control......................233 5.7.17 Handler I/O (Universal Interface)................233 5.7.18 RFFE GPIO Interface....................234 5.7.19 Additional Removable System Drive................235 5.7.20 Extended Power Range....................235 5.7.21 Extended Dynamic Range..................236 5.7.22 Receiver Step Attenuators..................238 5.7.23...
Page 7 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 6.5.1 Traces Tab........................301 6.5.2 Mem..........................306 6.5.3 All Mem All Data Tab....................309 6.5.4 Math Tab........................310 6.5.5 Time Domain Tab......................316 6.5.6 Time Gate Tab......................321 6.5.7 Distance to Fault Tab....................323 6.5.8 Trace Statistics Tab..................... 323 6.5.9...
Page 8 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 6.9.2 Bandwidth Tab......................387 6.9.3 Average Tab........................ 389 6.10 Sweep Softtool......................390 6.10.1 Sweep Params Tab..................... 390 6.10.2 Sweep Type Tab......................394 6.10.3 Trigger Tab........................405 6.10.4 Sweep Control Tab......................409 6.11 Cal Softtool........................ 413 6.11.1 Start Cal Tab....................... 413 6.11.2...
Page 9 Printer Setup Dialog....................625 6.14.5 Trace Data Tab......................627 6.14.6 More Tab........................627 6.15 Applic Softtool......................628 6.15.1 External Tools Application................... 628 6.15.2 TDR Application (R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20)..............630 6.15.3 DUT Centric Application....................659 6.15.4 Distance to Fault Application..................674 6.16 Display Softtool......................682 6.16.1 Diagram Tab........................682 6.16.2 Split Tab........................
Page 10 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 7.2.1 Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses)..........748 7.2.2 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax................748 7.2.3 SCPI Parameters......................752 Basic Remote Control Concepts................754 7.3.1 Traces, Channels, and Diagram Areas............... 754 7.3.2 Active Traces in Remote Control.................755 7.3.3...
Page 11 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 8.3.5 DISPlay Commands....................1023 8.3.6 FORMat Commands....................1049 8.3.7 HCOPy Commands....................1051 8.3.8 INITiate Commands....................1056 8.3.9 INSTrument Commands....................1058 8.3.10 MEMory........................1060 8.3.11 MMEMory Commands....................1061 8.3.12 OUTPut Commands....................1103 8.3.13 PROGram Commands....................1108 8.3.14 [SENSe:] Commands....................1111 8.3.15 SOURce Commands....................1249 8.3.16...
Page 12 ® Contents R&S ZNB/ZNBT 10.2 Errors during Firmware Installation/Update............1419 10.3 Collecting Information for Technical Support............1421 10.4 Contacting Customer Support................1422 11 Annexes.................... 1423 11.1 Administrative Tasks....................1423 11.1.1 Windows Operating System..................1423 11.1.2 Firmware Installation....................1424 11.2 System Recovery....................1425 11.3...
Page 13 Includes the contents of the getting started manual. The contents of the user manual are available as help in the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. The help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information for the instrument and its firmware.
Page 14 ● R&S ZNBT Service Manual 1.1.4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ZNB/ZNBT in secure areas. It is available for download on the Internet. 1.1.5 Basic Safety Instructions Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.
Page 15 ® Preface R&S ZNB/ZNBT Conventions Used in the Documentation 1.2 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1.2.1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation: Convention Description [Keys] Key and knob names are enclosed by square brackets. "Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as ments"...
Page 16 The R&S ZNB/ZNBT is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environ- ments. Use the R&S ZNB/ZNBT only for its designated purpose. Observe the operat- ing conditions and performance limits stated in the data sheet.
Page 17 Version 3.16 of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT firmware provides the following changes: New functionality ● Support of new frequency reference board Firmware version ► To check your R&S ZNB/ZNBT firmware version, select "Help" > "About..." from the main menu. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 18 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4 Getting Started 4.1 Putting the Analyzer into Operation This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the analyzer for the first time. Simple measurement examples are provided in Chapter 4.4, "Performing Measure-...
Page 19 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.2 Positioning the Instrument The network analyzer is designed for use under laboratory conditions, either on a bench top or in a rack. Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions An unsuitable operating site or test setup can damage the instrument and connected devices.
Page 20 The feet can break if they are overloaded. The overall load on the folded-out feet must not exceed 500 N. 4.1.4 Operation in a 19" Rack The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can be mounted in 19" racks using the adapter R&S ZZA-KN5 (order number 1175.3040.00). Proceed according to the mounting instructions supplied with the rack adapter.
Page 21 The R&S ZNBT is protected by a fuse located below the AC power switch; see Chap- ter 11.4.3, "Replacing Fuses", on page 1442. There are no such fuses on the R&S ZNB. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 22 2. If necessary, press the standby toggle key on the front panel to switch the instru- ment to ready state (R&S ZNB: green LED goes on; R&S ZNBT PWR LED turns from amber to green).
Page 23 AC power off and the standby state. 4.1.8 Standby and Ready State R&S ZNB: The standby toggle key is located in the bottom left corner of the front panel. In standby state, the right, amber LED is on, in ready state, the left, green LED is on.
Page 24 Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.9.1 Connecting a Monitor A standard monitor can be connected to the DVI-D connector of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. No extra configuration is required. Instruments equipped with the latest controller board also offer a DisplayPort. Safety aspects The monitor must be connected while the instrument is switched off (or in standby mode).
Page 25 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation ® To access Windows , use the button in the toolbar of the application window. 4.1.9.4 Connecting a Printer A printer can be connected to any of the USB connectors. After successful installation, it can safely be disconnected and reconnected even during measurements.
Page 26 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation ment. For both connection types, you can use either crossover or straight through (patch) cables. The IP address information is shown in the SYSTEM – [SETUP] > "Remote Settings" softtool tab. For the R&S ZNBT, it is also shown on the Mini display.
Page 27 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation A software update restores the original shortcut properties. 4.1.11 Changing the Screen Resolution (R&S ZNBT) In case the R&S ZNBT fails to adjust the display resolution properly when an external monitor is connected, proceed as follows: 1.
Page 28 DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network. 2. For the R&S ZNBT connect an external monitor, keyboard and mouse. 3. Press the Windows key in the SYSTEM keypad (R&S ZNB only) or on an external keyboard to access Windows ®...
Page 29 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4. Open the "Control Panel" > "Network and Sharing Center" > "Change adapter set- tings" dialog and right-click the local connection. Windows 7: open the "Control Panel" > "Network and Internet" > "Network and Sharing Center"...
Page 30 Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be changed. The default instrument name is a case-insensitive string with the following syntax: ZNB<max freq [GHz]>-<variant>-<serial_number>, ZNB40-N-<serial_number> ZNBT8-8-<serial_number>, ZNBT[20|26|40]-1-<serial_number> The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part...
Page 31 A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network. In the default configuration of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, the firewall is enabled. A remote desktop connection does not require any changes in the firewall settings.
Page 32 4.2.1 Front Panel R&S ZNB The front panel of a R&S ZNB consists of the touchscreen with the diagrams and soft- tool panels (left side), the hardkey area (right side) and the test port area below. Brief explanations on the controls and connectors, the hardkey area and the rear panel can be found on the next pages.
Page 33 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Figure 4-2: R&S ZNB40 with two ports 4.2.1.1 Touchscreen The analyzer is equipped with a 12.1'' XGA color touchscreen. The touchscreen pres- ents all measurement results, mostly in the form of diagrams. Besides, all instrument functions can be accessed and operated by tapping the control elements on the touch- screen.
Page 34 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Screen saver The screen saver function of the operating system can be used to switch off the display if the analyzer receives no command for a selectable period of time. The display is switched on again if any front panel key is pressed.
Page 35 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour The SYSTEM keys provide general system settings. ● ® [FILE] provides standard Windows functions used to create, save, recall or print recall sets, to copy the active screen and to shut down the application.
Page 36 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour – Confirm selections and entries made and close dialogs (equivalent to the "OK" button). – Compress or expand menus or the Help table of contents ● BACKSPACE deletes the last character before the cursor position or the selected character sequence or numeric value.
Page 37 Chapter 4.1.7, "Starting the Analyzer and Shutting Down", on page 22. 4.2.1.7 Front Panel Connectors The test ports and four USB connectors are located on the front panel of the R&S ZNB. Test Ports Numbered connectors: ● type N female for R&S ZNB4 and R&S ZNB8 ●...
Page 38 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour The USB ports can be used to connect: ● External PC accessories such as mouse or other pointing devices, a keyboard, printer or external storage device (USB stick, CD-ROM drive etc.). ● External measurement equipment such as a calibration unit, power meter, signal generator or switch matrix.
Page 39 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Numbered test port connectors: ● Type N female connectors for the R&S ZNBT8. Depending on the equipped port options there are 4, 8, 12, 16, 20 or 24 test ports. ● 3.5 mm male connectors for the R&S ZNBT20. Depending on the equipped port options there are 8, 12, 16, 20 or 24 test ports.
Page 40 Above the standby toggle switch some LEDs indicate various status information: ● [ERR]: operation state; if an error occurs, the LED lights up red; for more informa- tion on errors and troubleshooting see the R&S ZNB/ZNBT User Manual ● [LAN]: LAN error occurred ●...
Page 41 Two BNC connectors for 5 V TTL external trigger signals IN / EXT Chapter 6.10.3, "Trigger Tab", on page 405. TRIG REF OUT BNC output for the internal reference frequency of the R&S ZNB. Use this connector to synchronize other instruments to the analyzer. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 42 2 independent RF Front-End (RFFE) interfaces according to the MIPI® Alli- ance "System Power Management Interface Specification". – 10 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) pins. Device Option R&S ZNB-B12 "Device Control" provides a PCIe and a Direct Control con- Control nector. Chapter 5.7.16, "Device Control", on page 233.
Page 43 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Input levels, EMC The maximum input levels and voltages of the input connectors at the front and rear panel must not be exceeded. Match signals with 50 Ω to comply with EMC directives.
Page 44 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Instrument Tour Index Label Description Monitor External monitor connector (DisplayPort); see Chapter 4.1.9.1, "Connecting a Moni- (Display- tor", on page 24. Port) Type B USB 3.0 device (slave) connector for remote control of the instrument (see Device Chapter 4.1.9.6, "Connecting a USB Cable for Remote...
Page 45 Manual and remote control of the instrument In contrast to the R&S ZNB, the R&S ZNBT is primarily intended to be remote-control- led via the GPIB or LAN interface (see chapter 'Remote Control' in the user manual).
Page 46 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Figure 4-6: Function Keys Customizing the screen The contents of the screen and the size and position of many display and control ele- ments are not fixed. You can display or hide most elements. You can also drag and drop traces, info fields, and even the softtool panel to your preferred position;...
Page 47 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 2. Activate the desired softtool tab, e.g. "Z←Sij". 3. Select a control element, e.g. "Z←S11". The diagram immediately reflects your selection. The active trace shows the mea- surement results for the selected measured quantity.
Page 48 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Using the menu bar The menu bar at the bottom of the application screen provides alternative access to all instrument functions. To repeat the measured quantity selection described above, ► Select TRACE – [MEAS] > "Z←Sij" > "Z←S11".
Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 2. Select "S-Parameter" to open the "Meas" > "S-Params" softtool tab. 3. Select "Z←Sij" > "Z←S11". User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.2 Control Elements of the Application Window The application window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measure- ments and contains the diagrams for the results. There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function: ●...
Page 51 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.2.1 Title Bar By default, the analyzer GUI is shown in full screen mode, covering the whole screen and hiding the Windows taskbar. However, you can toggle the full screen mode using SYSTEM –...
Page 52 Softtools Softtools display groups of related settings as a tabbed panel. They can be opened via function keys on the front panel (R&S ZNB only) or the on-screen "Hard Key" panel, or via menu bar and context menu items. Figure 4-7: Scale softtool A softtool consists of a title area with a close/re-open icon and a tabbed panel below it.
Page 53 (R&S ZNB only) or a mouse. A short tap (left mouse click) expands a menu or sub- menu. If a menu command has no submenu assigned, a short tap (left mouse click) opens a dialog or directly activates the menu command.
Page 54 The (virtual) "Hard Key" panel provides on-screen access to the function keys (plus the [UNDO] and [REDO] key) that are available at the front panel of a R&S ZNB. Most of the function keys open a related softtool. For a short description, refer to section Chap- ter 4.2.1.2, "Function...
Page 55 The "Hard Key" panel is particularly useful if the analyzer is controlled from an external monitor or Remote Desktop. For the R&S ZNB, it is hidden by default, for the R&S ZNBT it is visible by default. You can display the "Hard Key" panel using one of the following methods: ●...
Page 56 245) ● the current date and time Figure 4-8: R&S ZNB/ZNBT with redefined physical ports Figure 4-9: R&S ZNB/ZNBT with switch matrix The progress bar shows a moving color gradient if the current sweep is too fast to be monitored, e.g.
Page 57 The analyzer displays measurement results as traces in rectangular diagrams. Markers are used to read specific numerical values and to search for points or regions on a trace. The following section presents some of the graphical tools the R&S ZNB/ZNBT provides for trace and marker handling.
Page 58 3. In the dialog box that is opened when you release the "New Trace" icon, select the S-parameter to be measured. For a four-port analyzer: The R&S ZNB/ZNBT generates a new trace for the selected S-parameter. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 59 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Alternative control elements To measure a different quantity, select TRACE – [MEAS]. Drag and drop a softkey rep- resenting a measured quantity to create a trace. Or simply select another softkey to change the measured quantity of the active trace.
Page 60 4.3.4.4 Using Drag and Drop You can drag and drop many of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's control and display elements to change their size and position. The drag and drop functionality is often more conven- ient to use than the equivalent buttons of the softtool panels. The following table gives an overview.
Page 61 4.3.5.1 Using Front Panel Keys On a R&S ZNB you can use the keys in the DATA ENTRY keypad to enter numbers, units, and characters. To enter a numeric value: 1. Select a numeric data input field to activate it.
Page 62 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument ● Use [-] to change the sign of the value. ● (-)9 Use [G/n], [M/μ], [k/m], or [x1] to multiply the entered value with factors of 10 (-)6 , 10 (-)3 or 1 and to add the appropriate physical unit.
Page 63 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 3. If desired, select a "Step Size" and use the cursor up/down buttons to increment/ decrement the current value. If a marker is active, you can also set the numeric value to the current marker value ("Set to Marker").
Page 64 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument Figure 4-10: Windows 10 on-screen keyboard To call up the on-screen keyboard: 1. Open the SYSTEM – [APPLIC] softtool. 2. Select "External Tools" 3. Select "Screen Keyboard". 4.3.6 Scaling Diagrams The analyzer provides various tools for customizing the diagrams and for setting the sweep range.
Page 65 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument The icon changes its background color from black to blue. ● In the active diagram area, select an appropriate rectangular area. The zoomed view shows the selected rectangle, scaled in both horizontal and verti- cal direction.
Page 66 "Zoom Config" toolbar icon and select "Mode Stimulus Zoom". Then use the "Zoom Select" icon to narrow the sweep range and adjust the vertical scaling. Refer to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT Help or User Manual for details. 4.3.6.2 Setting the Sweep Range...
Page 67 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument ● Tap and hold (with a mouse: right-click) the "Start" or "Stop" label in the channel list and select "Start Frequency", "Stop Frequency", "Center Frequency", or "Fre- quency Span" from the context menu.
Page 68 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 4.3.6.5 Circular Diagrams The radial scale of a circular diagram ("Polar", "Smith" or "Inverted Smith") can be changed with a single linear parameter, the "Ref Value". The reference value defines the radius of the outer circumference.
Page 69 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operating the Instrument 2. Place "M1" to the start value of the desired sweep range and tap TRACE – [MARKER] > "Set by Marker" > "Start = Marker". 3. Place "M2" to the stop value of the desired sweep range and tap TRACE –...
Page 70 ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements 4.4 Performing Measurements This chapter takes you through a sample session with a R&S ZNB/ZNBT network ana- lyzer and describes basic operation tasks. Safety considerations Before starting any measurement on your network analyzer, please note the instruc- tions given in Chapter 4.1, "Putting the Analyzer into...
Page 71 R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements test ports. It is recommended that you preset the R&S ZNB/ZNBT to start from a well- defined instrument state. 1. Connect the DUT between test ports 1 and 2 of the network analyzer as shown above.
Page 72 Chapter 4.3.5.2, "Using the Numeric Editor", on page 62). Tip: If you use the DATA ENTRY keys at the front panel for data entry (R&S ZNB only), type [1][.][7][7] and terminate the entry with the [G/n] key. Refer to Chapter 4.3.5, "Entering Data",...
Page 73 With a single Through, it is possible to perform a transmission normalization, compen- sating for a frequency-dependent attenuation and phase shift in the signal paths. Due to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's calibration wizard, calibration is a straightforward, guided process. 1. Replace the DUT by the Through standard of your calibration kit. Make sure to dis- connect all calibration units.
Page 74 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements Tip: For a R&S ZNBT with more than 4 ports, the graphical port representation is replaced by a generic port list. The selection logic is unchanged. 4. Select "Next" to proceed to the next page of the "Calibration Setting" wizard.
Page 75 Through standard. The similarity of real and expected traces indicates that the Through standard has been properly connected. After the R&S ZNB/ZNBT has completed the calibration sweep and calculated the correction data, the "Apply" button is enabled.
Page 76 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements corner of the diagram. The marker info field displays the stimulus value (frequency) and response value (magnitude of the transmission coefficient converted to a dB value) at the marker position. 2. Select TRACE – [MARKER], activate the "Marker Search" softtool tab and activate "Min"...
Page 77 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements Data transfer is made easier if external accessories are connected to the analyzer or if the instrument is integrated into a LAN. Refer to Chapter 4.1.9, "Connecting External Accessories", on page 23, and Chapter 4.1.12, "Remote Operation in a...
Page 78 ® Getting Started R&S ZNB/ZNBT Performing Measurements You can also use the basic transmission test setup, e.g. if you want to measure reflection and transmission parameters in parallel. ● The analyzer provides special calibration types for reflection measurements. Use the calibration wizard and select an appropriate type.
Page 79 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts 5 Concepts and Features The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. It contains a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, proc- ess and display measurement data.
Page 80 5.1.2 Recall Sets A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can handle multiple recall sets in par- allel, each of them displayed in a separate tab.
Page 81 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts 5.1.3.1 Trace Settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...)
Page 82 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts 5.1.3.3 Active and Inactive Traces and Channels A window can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a variable number of traces. One of these traces is active at each time. The active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram (Trc4 in the figure below): When a trace is selected in the diagram area, it becomes the active trace.
Page 83 To improve the accuracy, it is possible to insert a delay time before each partial mea- surement. In the default configuration, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT performs a partial measurement at all sweep points (partial sweep) before the hardware settings are changed. The next par- tial measurement is carried out in an additional sweep ("Alternated"...
Page 84 The support for parallel measurements on multiple DUTs depends on the analyzer type: ● For a 2-port R&S ZNB or a 4-port R&S ZNB without internal second source (see Chapter 5.7.13, "Internal Second Source", on page 232) this feature is not availa- ●...
Page 85 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts DUT1 DUT2 ● For analyzers with Internal Second Source, to reduce "crosstalk" between the DUTs a frequency offset can be applied between the corresponding port groups (see "Parallel Measurements with Frequency Offset"...
Page 86 It is possible to define an arbitrary drive order port for each configured DUT, both via analyzer GUI and remote interface. Parallel Measurements with Frequency Offset When performing parallel measurements on a R&S ZNB/ZNBT with Internal Second Source, it is possible to specify a minimum frequency offset between the port groups.
Page 87 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts Please note that in parallel measurement with frequency offset the firmware uses a modified IF as compared to measurements not using this mode. Because this modified IF requires a special calibration, it is essential to perform the...
Page 88 (implemented in hardware) has to be interrupted by the software regularly and cannot proceed autonomously after the initial phase lock. If the swept mode is selected and the R&S ZNB/ZNBT actually uses it (for at least one segment), this is indicated in the status bar:...
Page 89 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts If on the other hand the swept mode is not used although it was selected, the underly- ing reason is displayed in an information popup: ● The specifications of the data sheet are stated for stepped mode; in swept mode they are not guaranteed ●...
Page 90 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Concepts SYST. ERR. CORR. POWER POWER POWER (FACT) CORR. CORRECTION DATA CORR. DATA SYST. ERR. RATIOS SYSTEM CORR. ERROR CORR. DATA (USER) Channel data flow (for all traces of the channel) OFFSET (ALT. 1)
Page 91 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements 5.2 Screen Elements This section describes manual operation of the analyzer, including trace settings, mark- ers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instru- ment, refer to Chapter 5.3, "Measurement...
Page 92 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements 5.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select SYSTEM – [DISPLAY] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
Page 93 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements The type of each trace in a diagram is indicated in the trace list: "MEM<no>" at the beginning of the trace name indicates a memory trace (with default naming), Math at the end of the trace label indicates a mathematical trace. You can also hide a trace ("Invisible") without deleting it.
Page 94 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements ● The respective section's context menu (except for the type section) provides access to the most common related tasks. ● If the size of the diagram is too small, some of the sections are hidden. Enlarge or maximize the diagram to display all sections.
Page 95 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements ● The reference marker ("R") defines the reference value for all delta markers. ● A delta marker ("DeltaM1, DeltaM2...") indicates the coordinates relative to the ref- erence marker. A special set of markers M1 to M4 is provided for bandfilter search mode.
Page 96 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements The info field contains the following information: ● "M1, M2..." denote the marker numbers. Markers are displayed with the same color as the associated trace. ● The marker coordinates are expressed in one of the marker formats selected via TRACE –...
Page 97 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Marker Frmt"), or formatted individually (TRACE > [MARKER] > "Marker Props" > "Marker Format"). The available marker formats are defined for all measured quantities and trace formats (see Chapter 5.2.3.3, "Measured Quantities and Trace Formats",...
Page 98 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Marker Format Description Formula G + j B (Series) admittance: Unnormalized (series) conductance, susceptance, and either inductance or capacitance, in three ***) G + j B series or C lines (Inverted Smith diagram)
Page 99 Bandfilter Search In a bandfilter search, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT locates trace segments with a bandpass or bandstop shape and determines characteristic filter parameters. Bandpass and bandstop regions can be described with the same parameter set: ●...
Page 100 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements factor. For a meaningful definition of the bandwidth factor, the trace format must be "dB Mag". The info field contains the following search results: ● "Bandwidth" is the n-dB bandwidth of the bandpass/bandstop region, where n is a selectable bandwidth factor.
Page 101 The "Channel Name" appears in the first section. The default names for new chan- nels are Ch<n> with an automatically assigned number <n>. If a time domain transform is active, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT displays an additional line to indicate the stimulus range of the displayed time-domain trace.
Page 102 Channel list (separate context menus for channel name section, sweep range sec- tion, additional parameter section) To open a context menu associated with a display element, tap and hold (R&S ZNB only) or right-click the element for some seconds. Example:...
Page 103 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Dialogs are controlled in the usual way. For an introduction, refer to Chapter 4.3.3, "Working with Dialogs", on page 56. 5.2.2.1 Immediate vs. Confirmed Settings In some dialogs settings take effect immediately, so that the effect on the measurement is observable while the dialog is still open.
Page 104 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements 5.2.2.2 Common Dialogs Open Dialog The "Open File" dialog is used to open various file types (cal kit data, limit lines, sweep segment lists, ...). Depending on the context, the dialog is displayed with different caption, default direc- tory ("Traces"...
Page 105 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Depending on the context, the dialog is displayed with different caption, default direc- tory ("Traces" in the above screenshot), and file types. Context-specific options (e.g. "Output Format" in the dialog above) are accessible via controls in the section below the "Ask Before Overwriting"...
Page 106 ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements 5.2.3 Trace Formats A trace format defines how a trace is represented in a diagram. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT supports the following trace formats: ● Cartesian Trace Formats "dB Mag", "Phase", "SWR", "Unwr Phase", "Lin Mag", "Log Mag", "Real", "Imag" and "Delay".
Page 107 Figure 5-3: S11 trace in dB Mag format: sweep type Lin Freq (top) and Log Freq (bottom) Conversion of Complex to Real Quantities Among the measured quantities the R&S ZNB/ZNBT supports, only "Stability" factors, "Power Sensor" results, and "DC" values are real. All other results measured quantities complex.
Page 108 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements In diagrams, the response values are always represented as points in the two-dimen- sional complex plane: ● The complex 0 is located at the center of the diagram. ● The real part is drawn in horizontal direction, the imaginary part in vertical direction.
Page 109 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Examples for definite magnitudes and phase angles: ● The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit (Z = infinity, I = 0) is one, its phase is zero. ● The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit (Z = 0, U = 0) is one, its phase is –180 deg.
Page 110 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements The basic properties of the Smith chart follow from this construction: ● The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero reactance (real impedance). The center of the diagram represents Z/Z = 1 which is the reference impedance of the system (zero reflection).
Page 111 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements ● The circles for the points of equal resistance are centered on the real axis and intersect at Z = infinity. The arcs for the points of equal reactance also belong to circles intersecting at Z = infinity (open circuit point (1, 0)), centered on a straight vertical line.
Page 112 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements Inverted Smith chart construction The inverted Smith chart is point-symmetric to the Smith chart: The basic properties of the inverted Smith chart follow from this construction: ● The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero susceptance (real admittance). The...
Page 113 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Screen Elements plane are related as follows (see also: definition of matched-circuit (converted) admit- tances): = (1 - Γ) / (1 + Γ) Y / Y From this equation, it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the com- plex admittance to the real and imaginary parts of Γ:...
Page 114 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results normalized impedance or admittance) if they are used for transmission S-parame- ters, ratios and other quantities. ● For complex "Impedances", "Admittances", "Z-parameters", and "Y-parameters" generally a Cartesian format or the polar format is suitable.
Page 115 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results The figure above is sufficient for the definition of S-parameters but does not necessa- rily show the complete signal flow. In fact, if the source and load ports are not ideally matched, part of the transmitted waves are reflected off the receiver ports. An addi-...
Page 116 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Table 5-3: Squared S-parameters Available incident power (= the power provided by a generator with a source impedance equal to the reference impedance Z ) at DUT port i=1,2 Reflected power at DUT port i=1,2...
Page 117 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Redefining physical ports can be used to insert external components (e.g. external sig- nal separating devices, power amplifiers etc.) into the signal path. This allows you to develop custom measurements, e.g. to test high-power devices and extend the dynamic range.
Page 118 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results ● Renormalization of the balanced port impedances affects all measured quantities that the analyzer provides for balanced ports. The default reference impedance of a physical port is equal to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port (50 Ω...
Page 119 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results   2. Power waves In the model of Kurokawa ("Power Waves and the Scattering Matrix"), the wave quantities a and b are transformed as follows:      ...
Page 120 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Reflection Impedance The converted impedance Z (1 ≤ i ≤n) describes the input impedance at port i of the DUT. Example: For a 2-port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Z is the input impedance (matched-circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement).
Page 121 The shunt-thru method is used for measuring very low impedances. A typical applica- tion are measurements on power distribution network (PDN) components, such as bypass capacitors and DC-DC converters. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses S (i≠j) to calculate the DUT impedance using the formula: User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 122 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results 5.3.3.2 Z-Parameters The Z-parameters describe the impedances of a DUT with open output ports (impe- dance = 0). The analyzer provides the full set of Z-parameters including the transfer impedances (i.e. the complete nxn Z-matrix for an n port DUT).
Page 123 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results ● is the output impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I measured at port 2 (reverse measurement with open input, I = 0). Z-parameters can be easily extended to describe circuits with more than two ports or several modes of propagation.
Page 124 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results ● is the reverse transfer admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V (reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit, V = 0). ● is the output admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I...
Page 125 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results The notation for wave quantities is as follows: ● "a Src Port j" denotes the wave incoming at DUT port i, when DUT port j is stimula- ted. is detected at the reference receiver of the VNA port connected to DUT port i.
Page 126 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Figure 5-6: More Wave Quantities dialog The following detectors are available: ● "Normal" selects the default detector mode where each valid measurement point is displayed without modification. The analyzer then proceeds to the next sweep point.
Page 127 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results 5.3.6 Unbalance-Balance Conversion Unbalance-balance conversion is the simulation of one or more unbalance-balance transformers (baluns) integrated in the measurement circuit. It converts the DUT ports from an unbalanced state into a balanced state and virtually separates the differential and common mode signals.
Page 128 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Example: 2 physical ports: Reflection measurements on 1 balanced port Balanced port: Differential mode Log. Bal. port port Common mode 3 physical ports: Reflection and transmission measurements on 1 balanced port Single-ended...
Page 129 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results ● c: Common mode (for balanced ports) The notation of a general S-parameter is S , where <mout> and <min> <mout><min><out><in> denote the output and input port modes, <out> and <in> denote the output and input port numbers.
Page 130 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results 3. DUT with one balanced and one single-ended port. 4. DUT with two balanced ports or one balanced and two single-ended ports. Both device types are fully characterized by 4x4 mixed mode S-matrices.
Page 131 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Logical port i Logical port j (single-ended) (balanced) Physical port c Single- Log. Balanced Physical port a ended port port port Physical port d – = –S and Imb = –S –...
Page 132 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Measurement Results Stability factors are calculated as functions of the frequency or another stimulus parameter. They provide criteria for linear stability of two-ports such as amplifiers. A lin- ear circuit is said to be unconditionally stable if no combination of passive source or load can cause the circuit to oscillate.
Page 133 Chapter 5.7, "Optional Extensions and Accessories", on page 200. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can also check whether the measured values comply with speci- fied limits and export trace data, using different file formats. 5.4.1 Limit Check A limit line restricts the allowed range for some or all points of a trace, i.e. for a certain range of stimulus values.
Page 134 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Segments do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus" value of segment no. n does not have to be smaller than the "Start Stimulus"...
Page 135 While "Show Limit Line" is active, the diagrams display all limit line segments. Exception: In a segmented frequency sweep with point-based x-axis, gaps between the segments are minimized. To facilitate the interpretation, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT dis- plays only the limit line segments which provide the limit check criterion (the "tighter"...
Page 136 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces 5.4.1.2 Rules for Ripple Test Definition The analyzer places few restrictions on the definition of ripple limit ranges. The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus"...
Page 137 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 133).
Page 138 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit.
Page 139 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces 5.4.1.4 File Format for Limit Lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...
Page 140 5.4.2 Trace Files The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can store one or several data or memory traces to a file or load a memory trace from a file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. The analyzer provides several types of trace files: ●...
Page 141 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces When exporting traces to a file, it is recommended to set the analyzer to single sweep mode (CHANNEL – [SWEEP] > "Sweep Control" > "All Channels on Hold"). This mode ensures that a complete sweep is exported.
Page 142 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces can be replaced by any S-parameter, so the *.s1p format is suitable for exporting an arbitrary data trace representing an S-parameter. 2-port files (*.s2p) ! freq[Hz] re:S11 im:S11 re:S21 im:S21 re:S12...
Page 143 Note that when reimporting this type of file into standard applications (including the R&S ZNB/ZNBT itself), the reference resistance from the Touchstone option line is used and the impedance system underlying the data is not interpreted correctly. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 144 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces Example: Renormalization comments !The following Port Impedance Renormalization has been used when saving the data. !PortZ Port1:50+j0 Port2:70+j0 !Note: The Port Impedances differ from the reference impedance of this file. While reading the file the reference impedance value of the option line above is always used.
Page 145 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces arator" in the "Export ... Data" dialogs. A semicolon is inserted before the end of each line. The stimulus values are arranged in ascending order. 5.4.2.3 Finding the Best File Format The file format depends on how you want to use the exported data.
Page 146 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Operations on Traces Set up a shared memory buffer The setup of a shared memory buffer and the allocation of trace data is performed by a sequence of SYSTem:DATA:MEMory... commands, starting with an INITialize and finished by a COMMit.
Page 147 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 5.5 Calibration Calibration or system error correction is the process of eliminating systematic, reprodu- cible errors from the measurement results (S-parameters and derived quantities; see Chapter 5.1.5, "Data Flow", on page 89). The process involves the following stages: 1.
Page 148 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Cal Off label A label "Cal Off" appears in the trace line if the system error correction no longer applies to the trace: This can happen for one of the following reasons: ●...
Page 149 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Table 5-7: Overview of calibration types Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflection Normali- Open or Short for Port i Reflection tracking Low to medium Reflection measure- zation ments on any port.
Page 150 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflect (equal at Reflection tracking, High Reflection and both ports), Match, transmission mea- (n-port) Source match, surements, espe- Through (between Directivity, cially in test fixtures.
Page 151 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ● Manual reflection normalizations offer Complementary Match Standard Measure- ments ● Manual transmission normalizations support Complementary Isolation Measure- ment (optional). Complementary Match Standard Measurements For reflection normalizations, the mandatory Open or Short measurements can be complemented by optional Match measurements.
Page 152 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration A one-path two-port calibration is also the best calibration method for test setups with unidirectional signal flow. 5.5.1.4 TOSM and UOSM Calibration TOSM A TOSM (Through – Open – Short – Match) calibration requires the same standards as the one path two ports calibration, however, all measurements are performed in the for- ward and reverse direction.
Page 153 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration UOSM: TOSM with unknown Through The analyzer can perform a TOSM calibration with any 2-port network serving as through connection, as long as it fulfills the reciprocity condition S . The modified TOSM calibration is referred to as UOSM (Unknown through – Open – Short – Match) calibration.
Page 154 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Figure 5-7: Adapter Removal vs. UOSM The obtained adapter characteristics are mathematically removed from the obtained error coefficients. Uncertainties arising from a non-ideal characterization of the unknown through almost cancel, whereas they add up in the UOSM technique. As a consequence, Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results.
Page 155 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ● Adapter Removal is not defined for more than 2 ports. However, with "Multiple Cali- brations per Channel" enabled, multiple (disjoint) port pairs can be calibrated using Adapter Removal. ● Currently Adapter Removal is not supported with Automatic Calibration.
Page 156 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration TRL with several lines and with TRM The system of equations solved to derive the error terms is such that singularities occur whenever the length difference ΔL between the Through and the Line is an inte- ger multiple of half of the wave length: ...
Page 157 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Example: TRL calibration with two and three Lines If several Lines with different lengths are measured, the analyzer automatically divides the calibrated range into segments. The calibration data of the longest line is applied to the lowest segment, the calibration data of the shortest line to the highest segment.
Page 158 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration where l denotes the electrical length of the longest of the used Line standards, l long the length of the Through. The analyzer assumes l << l and calculates f long (18*l ). At frequencies below f...
Page 159 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration If an external switch matrix is configured and you want to calibrate three or more test ports that are all on the same submatrix, then an extra Through measurement is required: Complement the minimum set of n-1 Throughs (as explained above) by an additional Through at a port pair that is connected by a "chain of throughs"...
Page 160 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration The standards are grouped into several types (Open, Through, Match,...) correspond- ing to the different input quantities for the analyzer's error models. The standard type also determines the equivalent circuit model used to describe its properties. The circuit model depends on several parameters that are stored in the cal kit file associated with the calibration kit.
Page 161 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Offset parameters The offset parameters have the following physical meaning: ● The delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the standard. The electrical length is equal to the delay times the speed of light in the vacuum. It is a measure for the length of transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane.
Page 162 The precision of the calibration kit parameters determines the accuracy of the system error correction and of the measurements. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT displays a warning if you use a typical or ideal parameter set to calibrate a channel.
Page 163 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration kits can be obtained as network analyzer accessories; refer to the data sheet for the relevant ordering information. The name of all parameter sets is equal to the name of the corresponding calibration kit model.
Page 164 Sliding Match have been measured. However, it is often desir- able to acquire calibration data from both standards. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can acquire correction data for up to 20 positions. The analyzer combines the data in an appropriate manner: ●...
Page 165 On loading some older R&S ZVR-specific *.ck files, e.g. the R&S ZV-Z23 cal kit file, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT generates the message "File does not comply with instrument cali- bration kit file format". The files must be converted using an R&S ZVR network ana- lyzer equipped with a firmware version V3.52 or later.
Page 166 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 5.5.3 Calibration Pool The calibration "Pool" is a collection of correction data sets (cal groups) that the ana- lyzer stores in a common directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Data. Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and recall sets. Each cal group is stored in a separate file named <CalGroup_name>.cal.
Page 167 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration, because: ● There is no need to connect several standards manually. The number of connec- tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports.
Page 168 Safety aspects ● The calibration unit is intended for direct connection to R&S ZNB/ZNBT network analyzers following the procedure described above. You can also connect the unit before switching on the analyzer. Do not connect the unit to other USB hosts, e.g.
Page 169 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration 5.5.5.2 Performing an Automatic Calibration After connection and initialization of the calibration unit, perform the automatic calibra- tion of the related test ports using the "Calibration Unit" wizard (CHANNEL – [CAL] > "Start Cal" > "Start... (Cal Unit)"; see Chapter 6.11.1.3, "Calibration Unit...
Page 170 (suitable for the cal unit with adapters) may be desirable. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT provides a characterization wizard which you can use to generate your own characterization data sets for (modified) R&S cal units. The characterization data can be stored in the cal unit and used for automatic calibration whenever needed.
Page 171 (ordered) pair of test ports requiring a Through mea- surement For Full n-Port calibrations, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT applies the "reduced through" logic to calculate the correction terms for those test port pairs that are not covered by a single assignment and hence cannot be measured directly (see Chapter 5.5.1.11, "Full n-Port...
Page 172 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Calibration Minimal solution Default solution (minimal) type Full One Port Each calibrated test port must appear in exactly one Subdivide the n test ports into port assignment. groups of m ports with increasing port numbers.
Page 173 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Test Port Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 4 Cal Unit Port 2 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 4 Cal Unit Port 2 Cal Unit Port 3...
Page 174 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration Table 5-13: Recommended calibration methods for various measurements Measurement System error correction Scalar Power calibration SMARTerCal S-parameter meas. on linear Not necessary Not necessary DUTs S-parameter meas. on non-lin- Not possible ear DUTs -->...
Page 175 2. Internal source power flatness calibration: In the following steps, the calibrated reference receiver is used to adjust the source power. To this end, the R&S ZNB/ ZNBT performs a series of calibration sweeps at varying source power until the number of "Total Readings"...
Page 176 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration After the source power calibration, one can expect the power at the calibration plane to be within the range of uncertainty of the power meter. The reference receiver reading corresponds to the calibrated source power. After a change of the sweep points or sweep range, the analyzer interpolates or extrapolates the calibration data;...
Page 177 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration ment receiver calibration. After a change of the sweep points or sweep range, the ana- lyzer interpolates or extrapolates the calibration data. 5.5.6.3 Power Calibration Labels Power calibration labels in the trace list for wave quantities and ratios inform you about the status and type of the current scalar power calibration.
Page 178 The known transmission coefficients of the two-port can be entered manually or automatically (CHANNEL – [CAL] > "Pwr Cal Settings" > "Transm. Coeffi- cients..."). The R&S ZNB/ZNBT supports two different test scenarios. A: Two-port at DUT (during measurement) Test and measurement procedure: 1.
Page 179 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Calibration B: Two-port at power meter (during calibration) Test and measurement procedure: 1. Perform the calibration with the additional two-port between the analyzer port and the power sensor. During the calibration, the analyzer increases the power sensor values by the 2-port transmission coefficients to move the calibration plane of the power calibration towards the input of the DUT.
Page 180 5.5.7.3 Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration As described in Chapter 5.5.7, "SMARTerCal", on page 179, the power meter results of a SMARTerCal are only used to calibrate the receivers of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. To User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 181 The scalar source power calibration and the SMARTerCal can be performed in any order. As a result of the combined calibration, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT measures vector error-corrected S-parameters; the scalar power correction is applied to wave quantities and ratios.
Page 182 Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The R&S ZNB/ZNBT offers multiple possibilities to calibrate several channels in paral- lel: ● Calibrate multiple channels in one go, using the same calibration type on the same ports for all channels In this case, for each port to be calibrated the same calibration standards have to be connected.
Page 183 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding calibration plane. For a line with permittivity ε and mechanical length L the delay mech and the electrical length are calculated as follows: In the CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] > "Offset" softtool tab, "Delay","Electrical Length"...
Page 184 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Length and delay measurement, related settings "Auto Length" is suited for length and delay measurements on transmission lines. 1. Connect a (non-dispersive) cable to a single analyzer port no. n and measure the reflection factor S 2.
Page 185 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Auto Length for logical ports The "Auto Length" function can be used for balanced port configurations as well. If the active test port is a logical port, then the same length offset must be assigned to both physical ports that are combined to form the logical port.
Page 186 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● "Auto Length and Loss" for a wave quantity centers the corrected dB magnitude as close as possible around 0 dBm. ● "Auto Length and Loss" for S-parameters and ratios centers the corrected dB mag- nitude as close as possible around 0 dB.
Page 187 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ted transmission factor is resolved by a comparison with the phase obtained in an Auto Length calculation. This compensation type is recommended for test fixture connec- tions that do not have the properties described above.
Page 188 5.6.2 Embedding and Deembedding The R&S ZNB/ZNBT allows you to define virtual networks to be added to/removed from the measurement circuit for a DUT with single ended or balanced ports. This con- cept is referred to as embedding/deembedding.
Page 189 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Single-ended Balanced port port Balun Matching circuit The idea of virtual embedding is to simulate the matching network and avoid using physical circuitry so that the analyzer ports can be directly connected to the input and output ports of the DUT.
Page 190 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding To be numerically removed, the real network must be described by a set of S-parame- ters or by an equivalent circuit of lumped elements. Deembedding the DUT effectively extends the calibration plane towards the DUT ports, enabling a realistic evaluation of the DUT without the distorting network.
Page 191 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L (as seen from the analyzer port), followed by a serial C or L. They are named Shunt C, Serial L / Shunt L, Serial C / Shunt C, Serial C / Shunt L, Serial L.
Page 192 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding parameters, or the entire transformation network can be described by imported 4-port S-parameters. The first network is defined by its S-parameters stored in an imported four-port Touch- stone file (*.s4p). No additional parameters are required.
Page 193 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Since FW version 1.93, the "capacitance C in parallel with resistance R" circuit blocks can alternatively be represented as "capacitance C in parallel with conduc- tance G" circuit blocks. 5.6.2.5...
Page 194 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The R&S ZNB/ZNBT FW handles Port Pair De-/Embedding as a special case of Port De-/Embedding. 5.6.2.6 Port Set De-/Embedding The port set de-/embedding feature allows de-/embedding a linear 2m-port network connecting m physical VNA ports to m physical DUT ports (m≥2).
Page 195 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● For port pairs (i.e. for m=2), the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Chapter 5.6.2.5, "Port Pair...
Page 196 Eazy De-embedding Based on IEEE 370 (option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210) The tools are integrated into the deembedding functionality of the analyzer firmware. More fixture modeling tools may be added in future releases of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT firmware. Test Setup The setup below shows an example for verifying the high-speed differential signal lines on a PCB.
Page 197 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Fixture Modeling Process For all supported tools, the fixture modeling proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a calibration to the fixture connectors. 2. Measure one or more PCB test coupons for the related fixture.
Page 198 The R&S ZNB/ZNBT's current implementation of the fixture modeling tool support assumes symmetrical lead-ins and lead-outs. 5.6.2.10 Combining Several De-/Embedding Networks The R&S ZNB/ZNBT allows you to select a combination of networks to be numerically added/removed at different layers ● 2-port networks at single ended physical ports ●...
Page 199 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Figure 5-13: De-/Embedding calculation flow This means that the real networks are removed before virtual networks are added. The (de-)embedding steps are carried out in the following order: 1. Single Ended Deembedding: every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2-port network 2.
Page 200 For a complete list of options, accessories, and extras refer to the product brochure or to the "Options" section of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT product pages on the Internet. The following sections provide an introduction to the software and hardware options described in this documentation.
Page 201 5.7.2 Time Domain Analysis Option R&S ZNB-K2 / R&S ZNBT-K2 The network analyzer measures and displays complex S-parameters and other quanti- ties as a function of the frequency. The measurement results can be filtered and math- ematically transformed to obtain the time domain representation, which often gives a clearer insight into the characteristics of the DUT.
Page 202 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Time domain transforms can be calculated in band pass or low pass mode. For the lat- ter, the analyzer offers the impulse and step response as two alternative transformation types. A wide selection of windows can be used to optimize the time domain response and suppress side lobes due to the finite sweep range.
Page 203 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories point at zero frequency (DC value). The time domain result is complex, with an undetermined phase depending on the delay of the signal. ● Low pass mode: The measurement results are continued towards f = 0 (DC value) and mirrored at the frequency origin so that the effective sweep range (and thus the response resolution) is more than doubled.
Page 204 The point symmetry with respect to the DC value makes harmonic grids suitable for lowpass time domain transformations. Visualization of the harmonic grid algorithms The R&S ZNB/ZNBT provides three different algorithms for harmonic grid calculation. The three harmonic grids have the following characteristics: ●...
Page 205 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Keep "Frequency Gap and Number of Points" means that the number of sweep points and their relative spacing is maintained. If the start frequency of the sweep is sufficiently above the f , the entire set of sweep points is shifted towards lower frequencies so that the stop frequency is decreased.
Page 206 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Finding the appropriate algorithm The three types of harmonic grids have different advantages and drawbacks. Note that for a bandpass transformation the grid parameters have the following effect: ● A wider sweep range (i.e. a larger bandwidth) increases the time domain resolu- tion.
Page 207 5.7.2.6 Time Domain S Measurements VSWR The vector network analyzer R&S ZNB/ZNBT with time domain option K2 supports TD site VSWR measurements. For the frequency range 1 GHz to 18 GHz, this method of S measurement is pro- VSWR posed in standard ANSI C63.25.
Page 208 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories EMC Test Site Validation EMC test sites for radiated emission measurements rely on free-space conditions to minimize the influence of reflections on the received signal. Practically, near free-space conditions are achieved by shielded enclosures fully lined with RF absorbing material.
Page 209 With option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT firmware implements a "virtual" signal generator that is able to generate multilevel PAM signals (NRZ, PAM-4, PAM-8, PAM-16), including a simulated low pass behavior. The simulated eye diagram using the DUT's measured S parameters gives an extensive overview regarding the signal integrity of the system.
Page 210 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-14: Eye Diagram (NRZ modulated) The measurement proceeds as follows: 1. The analyzer performs a frequency sweep. 2. The impulse response is calculated based on the results of the preceding fre- quency sweep.
Page 211 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-15: Eye Diagram Result Info Field The following results are available: ● Eye Minimum and Eye Maximum These values represent the minimum and maximum outputs of the eye diagram processing.
Page 212 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Opening Factor This is a measure of the effects of amplitude noise on the vertical eye opening. Accordingly, it is equal to (("Eye Top" - σ ) - ("Eye Base" + σ...
Page 213 DUT, which might be more intuitive for users of digital oscilloscopes that are not famil- iar with vector network analyzers. The Automatic Harmonic Grid from the option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K2 "Time domain Analysis" is used to ease setting up the frequency grid for all measurements provided by the option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20.
Page 214 5.7.3 Distance to Fault Measurements Option R&S ZNB-K3 / R&S ZNBT-K3 With option K3 "Distance-to-Fault", the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can locate faults and disconti- nuities on cables and transmission lines. Faults produce peaks on the impulse response (in the time domain) that is calculated from the measured reflection S-parameter trace via inverse Fourier transformation.
Page 215 5.7.4 Frequency Conversion Measurements Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4 With option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4, the frequencies of the source ports can be configured independently. The source and receive frequencies of the ports are always equal. Arbi- trary port settings represent a major extension to the analyzer's measurement function- ality;...
Page 216 Independent source powers for Port 1 and Gen1 can be configured in addition, if so desired. Arbitrary Power Configuration Arbitrary power configuration is also part of option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. Internal Second Source If an internal second source is available, the mixer measurements outlined above (and many other measurements) can be performed without an additional external generator;...
Page 217 Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.4.1 Calibration Options In arbitrary mode, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT automatically calibrates the source and receive frequency ranges of all ports, according to the frequency conversion settings in the "Port Settings" dialog or in dedicated configuration dialogs.
Page 218 A R&S ZNB/ZNBT with two internal sources (see Chapter 5.7.13, "Internal Second Source", on page 232) requires one external generator, all other R&S ZNB require two external generators. A standard mixer measurement with a single mixer stage and no frequency multipliers corresponds to the figure above with the second mixer and LO 2 omitted and m = 1.
Page 219 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories signals) or by an external generator. A test setup with two mixers involves two inde- pendent LO signals at both mixers. ● The IF signal is the mixer output signal (mixing product), which is at one of the fol- lowing conversion frequencies: IF = LO + RF or IF = |LO –...
Page 220 The analyzer implicitly accounts for the logical port set- tings. 5.7.4.3 Intermodulation Measurements Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K14 The intermodulation measurement requires option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K14 and, as a pre- requisite, the Frequency Conversion Measurements option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. The "Intermodulation Wizard" facilitates the measurement configuration and the selec- tion of results (see Chapter 6.12.4, "Intermod.
Page 221 (k – 1)/2 times the tone distance; see also "Intermodulation Measurement Results" on page 223. For a two-port R&S ZNB, a test setup with an external generator and a combiner is required. Lower Tone Upper Tone The lower tone signal is generated at port 1, the upper tone is provided by the external generator.
Page 222 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Lower Tone Upper Tone An external combiner is required anyway. Operation with Internal Second Source is not supported if External Switch Matrices used. The intermodulation distortion measurement can be extended to frequency-converting DUTs.
Page 223 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Lower Tone Upper Tone Intermodulation Measurement Results The intermodulation measurement provides two different types of results: ● In the swept measurement, the analyzer performs a frequency or power sweep of the two-tone stimulus signal and displays the selected intermodulation quantities as a function of the lower-tone frequency or power.
Page 224 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● In the intermodulation spectrum measurement ("CW Mode Spectrum"), the fre- quency and power of the lower and upper tones is kept constant. The analyzer dis- plays all intermodulation products near the signals up to a selectable order.
Page 225 Selectivity is automatically set to high, but can be changed manually. 5.7.5 Receiver Bandwidth 10 MHz Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K17 This software option increases the maximum receiver bandwidth of a R&S ZNB/ZNBT from 1 MHz to 10 MHz. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 226 Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.6 Frequency Resolution 1 mHz Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K19 This software option improves the frequency resolution of a R&S ZNB/ZNBT to 1 mHz. 5.7.7 Measurement Uncertainty Analysis Option R&S ZNB-K50/R&S ZNB-K50P Measurement uncertainty analysis is available if option R&S ZNB-K50 and METAS VNA Tools (version 2.2.6 or higher) are installed on the instrument.
Page 227 Required input data for METAS VNA Tools: ● METAS VNA model (noise floor, trace noise, receiver linearity, drift) For R&S ZNB variants that support option R&S ZNB-K50, the VNA model is provi- ded by the analyzer firmware. ● Connector types Part of the uncertainty calculation is the number of reconnections between calibra- ted ports and calibration standards or DUT.
Page 228 EaZy Deembedding (EZD) is an implementation of the IEEE algorithm for generating deembedding files from a symmetrical 2x thru measurement. Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210 allows you to model a test fixture using the EZD fixture modeling tool and to deembed selected ports using the generated touchstone files.
Page 229 Figure 5-21: Fixture modeling: EZD – Balanced Ports dialog ● For general information about fixture de-embedding, see Chapter 5.6.2.9, "Fixture Modeling and Deembedding", on page 196. ● Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210 can be ordered with a new instrument or retrofitted at Rohde&Schwarz service. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 230 ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.9 In-situ De-Embedding Option R&S ZNB-K220/R&S ZNBT-K220 This option offers a pre-installed or service-retrofitted version of AtaiTec's In Situ De- Embedding (ISD) tool for fixture de-embedding. The tool is integrated into the de-embedding functionality of the analyzer firmware.
Page 231 Typically used for material characterization (best accuracy, self-validation of results). Figure 5-22: Test coupons for 1L, 2L and 3L measurements Option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 can be ordered with a new instrument or retrofitted at Rohde&Schwarz service. 5.7.12 Bias Tees (R&S ZNB only) Option R&S ZNB-B1 for R&S ZNB4|8...
Page 232 Independent signals require the source ports to reside in different port groups. On the R&S ZNB, for example, you cannot use ports 1 and 2 as independent source ports. A R&S ZNBT on the other hand must be equipped with at least 12 ports to allow independent signals.
Page 233 The current hardware of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT-B10 does not support GPIB bus control- ler mode, i.e. the B10 cannot be used to control external devices via GPIB. If you want to use GPIB to control external devices from the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, you have to use an additional USB-to-IEC/IEEE Adapter.
Page 234 USB to RFFE adapter. For these kinds of applications, Rohde & Schwarz has developed an RFFE-GPIO extension board for the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. This board is equipped with a 25-pin female connector interface providing 2 independent RF Front-End (RFFE) interfaces accord- ing to the MIPI®...
Page 235 ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Risk of board and instrument damage Please turn off the R&S ZNB before mounting an internal RFFE-GPIO extension board R&S ZN-B15. A hot plug installation is not supported and can damage board and instrument. Current and voltage measurements (variants 03 only) For test purposes, variants 03 of the R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 can apply constant, pin-spe-...
Page 236 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Analyzer Option Minimum source power R&S ZNB8, 2 ports R&S ZNB8-B22 R&S ZNB8, 4 ports R&S ZNB8-B24 R&S ZNB20, 2 ports R&S ZNB20-B22 -60 dBm R&S ZNB20, 4 ports R&S ZNB20-B24 R&S ZNB40, 2 ports...
Page 237 Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories kHz bandwidth and full 2-port calibration can now use 100 kHz to become significantly faster. Table 5-23: Extended Dynamic Range Options for R&S ZNB Analyzer type 2-port 4-port R&S ZNB4 R&S ZNB4-B52 R&S ZNB4-B54...
Page 238 The attenuation values can be set between 0 dB and 30 dB (in 10 dB steps); see "Step Attenuators" on page 384. The following step attenuators are available: Table 5-24: R&S ZNB Analyzer type Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 R&S ZNB4...
Page 239 P is required. DC power measurement For the R&S ZNB/ZNBT an external power supply is required to measure P The DC power P supplied to the DUT can be measured using one or two of the four DC inputs DC INPUT 1...4 at the rear panel (option R&S ZVBx-B81). The Power Added Efficiency dialog suggests different measurement types involving different test setups.
Page 240 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Table 5-26: PAE measurement types Measurement type / Input parameters / Circuit diagram Description Constant voltage source The DC power supply provides a constant voltage U ; a precision resistor R is connec- ted in series to the DUT.
Page 241 R&S ZNB/ZNBT. The current B10 option does not offer this functionality. To get the adapter to work, you have to install the NI VISA library on the R&S ZNB/ ZNBT. 5.7.25 External Power Meters The connection of an external power meter to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can serve different purposes.
Page 242 (SYSTEM – [SETUP] > "External Devices" > "Power Meters"). Configured power meters appear in many con- trol elements of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, e.g. in the port configuration and in the power cal- ibration dialogs.
Page 243 R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.26 External Generators The connection of an external generator to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can serve different purposes. ● Extended measurement functionality: Each external generator represents an addi- tional source port. External generators increase the number of RF input signals for the DUT.
Page 244 External generators must be configured in the SYSTEM – [SETUP] softtool before they are available as additional sources. Configured generators appear in many control ele- ments of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, e.g. in the "More Ratios", "More Wave Quantities", port configuration and power calibration dialogs.
Page 245 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Use another device as master: Set the analyzer to "External" frequency reference and synchronize it (and all other devices) to the master's reference clock signal, fed in at the REF IN connector on the analyzer's rear panel.
Page 246 DUT, resulting in a higher measurement speed, reliability and repeatability. The firmware of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is able to control switch matrices from Rohde & Schwarz directly. For example, a 4-port R&S ZNB8 in combination with two R&S ZN- Z84 can work as a multi-port network analyzer with up to 48 ports, seamlessly perform- ing the required matrix switching operations.
Page 247 5.7.27.2 Matrix Setup and Operation Setting up a switch matrix at the R&S ZNB/ZNBT firmware typically involves the follow- ing steps: 1. establish the physical connection via the appropriate management interface (USB or LAN or Direct Control).
Page 248 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Example: The 4x24 extension of switch matrix R&S ZN-Z84 consists of 2 separate 2x12 subma- trices, where matrix VNA ports of the "left" submatrix cannot be connected to the test ports of the "right"...
Page 249 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories ZV-Z82-16 Figure 5-26: ZV-Z82-16: limited connectivity 5.7.27.4 Multiple Paths: Precision vs. Speed A switch matrix may offer multiple routes to a given matrix test port and hence mea- surements may be performed using different physical paths (where a path consists of the traversed VNA connections and matrix routes).
Page 250 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories Priority 1 Routes Priority 2 Routes Figure 5-27: ZV-Z81 Routes and priorities Example: For an R&S ZN-Z8x, each route traverses exactly one of the equipped 2x6 modules. The overall route quality is determined by the number of solid state switches traversed...
Page 251 As for "slow" management connections (via USB or LAN) the fundamental trade-off between precision and speed cannot be resolved, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT allows to select which optimization should be performed.
Page 252 ® Concepts and Features R&S ZNB/ZNBT Optional Extensions and Accessories 2-port VNA Route 1 Route 2 ● 4 paths per transmission measurement for an N-port VNA with N≥4 4-port VNA Route Route Route Route This kind of "multipath calibration" offers the following additional benefit: During manual calibration, the measured reflection/transmission coefficients are pre- sented as memory traces - one per path.
Page 253 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Function Keys and Softtools 6 GUI Reference This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the analyzer. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly.
Page 254 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Function Keys and Softtools Table 6-1: Function keys and softtools (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action TRACE – [MEAS] Alt + Shift + A Meas Softtool default TRACE – [FORMAT] Alt + Shift + B...
Page 255 The "Meas" softtool allows you to select the quantities to be measured and displayed. Access: TRACE – [MEAS] Background information For a detailed description of all measurement results of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, refer to Chapter 5.3, "Measurement Results", on page 114.
Page 256 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool 6.2.1 S-Params Tab Selects S-parameters as measured quantities. S-parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer. They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction. S-parameters (and derived quantities such as Y- and Z-parameters) fully characterize a linear DUT.
Page 257 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine:SENDed S<out><in> Selects one of the four elements of the standard 2-port S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "S11" | "S12" | "S21" | "S22"...
Page 258 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ted channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 512), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out). 6.2.1.2 S-Parameter Wizard The "S-Parameter Wizard" guides you through the setup of a standard multi-port S- parameter measurement in a frequency sweep.
Page 259 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool not need to change this value unless you want to renormalize the port impedances; Chapter 5.3.2, "Reference Impedances", on page 117. 3. Select the measurement parameters and the diagram areas. Depending on the test setup selected in...
Page 260 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Instrument reset To obtain a predictable result, the measurement wizard has to reset all settings except the current calibration data. Store your recall set if you do not want to lose the current configuration.
Page 261 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The port configurations are arranged in the list to the right. The resulting port assign- ment is shown on the left-hand side of the "Predefined Config" tab. ● For a single-ended port, the diagram shows a single line between the physical test port and the logical port.
Page 262 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ● To define a balanced port, select two physical ports and tap "Balanced". ● To dissolve balanced ports, select them and tap "Single". ● To exclude logical ports from the measurement, select them and tap "Unused".
Page 263 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Furthermore, provides functions for renumbering the logical ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar Reference Impedance Tab The "Reference Impedance" tab of the "Balanced Ports" dialog allows you to define (or redefine) the impedances of the logical ports.
Page 264 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool By default, the reference impedance of a physical port is set to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port. However, it can be defined as an arbitrary complex value (renormalization of port impedances). By changing the refer- ence impedance, it is possible to convert the measured values at 50 Ω...
Page 265 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Renormalization According to Theory of Selects the waveguide circuit theory for renormalization. The conversion formulas of these theories only differ if the reference impedance of at least one test port has a non- zero imaginary part.
Page 266 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The predefined wave quantities can all be obtained with the same test setup, where a 2-port DUT is connected between the analyzer ports 1 and 2. The stimulus signal is provided by the analyzer port 1 or 2 ("Source Port").
Page 267 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The notation for ratios follows the usual scheme of the vector network analyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ●...
Page 268 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>" Detector Selects the algorithm that is used to calculate the results points from the raw measure- ment data. For details refer to Chapter 5.3.5.3, "Detector Settings",...
Page 269 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ● "a1 Source Port 1" is the wave transmitted at physical port 1. In a standard S- parameter measurement, this wave is fed to the input port (port 1) of the DUT (for- ward measurement).
Page 270 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The notation for wave quantities follows the usual scheme of the vector network ana- lyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves.
Page 271 The intermodulation measurement requires options R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4 and R&S ZNB/ ZNBT-K14. The results are available when the measurement has been properly config- ured on the "Intermod."...
Page 272 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool 6.2.4.1 Controls on the Intermod. Tab The following buttons in the "Intermod." tab open associated dialogs: ● "More IM Products...": see Chapter 6.2.4.2, "IM Products Dialog", on page 273 ● "More Intercept...": see Chapter 6.2.4.3, "Intercept Points...
Page 273 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool ● "Lower Tone at DUT In", "Lower Tone at DUT Out", "Upper Tone at DUT In", and "Upper Tone at DUT Out" are measurements of the two fundamental waves of the intermodulation measurement.
Page 274 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool "Upper" The "Upper" intermodulation products are measured at frequencies above the upper tone. "Lower" The "Lower" intermodulation products are measured at frequencies below the lower tone. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Relative If "Relative" is selected, the intermodulation product is displayed in dB units relative to the measured lower tone level at the DUT output ("Lower Tone at DUT Out").
Page 275 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Side Defines the position of the intercept point relative to the lower and upper tones. "Major" Denotes the lower or upper intercept point, whichever is smaller. The "Major" intercept point reveals the worst-case performance of the DUT.
Page 276 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Z←S<out><in> selector Selects a converted impedance parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. For an n-port vector network analyzer, the pull-down list provides the full set of n impedance parameters. Converted impedance parameters are expressed as Z←S , where <out>...
Page 277 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", 'SHUNT-S12' | 'SHUNT-S13 | ... | 'SHUNT-S21' | 'SHUNT-S23' | ...
Page 278 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S11" | "Y-S12" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S11" | "Y-S22" | ... Y←S<out><in> softkeys Selects the 2-port converted admittance parameters. The parameters describe the admittances of a 2-port DUT, obtained in forward and reverse transmission and reflec- tion measurements: ●...
Page 279 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool 6.2.7 Y-Z-Params Tab Allows you to select Y- and Z-parameters as measured quantities. Both Y- and Z- parameters can serve as an alternative to S-parameters for characterizing a linear n- port network. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
Page 280 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The four 2-port Y-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V measured at port 1 (forward measurement with output terminated in a short circuit, = 0).
Page 281 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool The "Imbal. CMRR" measurements require at least two logical ports are available, at least one of them balanced. Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.3.6, "Unbalance-Balance Conversion", on page 127 ●...
Page 282 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Imb21/Imb12 /CMRR21/CMRR12 Selects one of the standard 2-port imbalance or CMRR parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. The buttons are available if either logical port 1 or logical port 2 (or both) is defined as a balanced port.
Page 283 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Logical port i Logical ports j,k (balanced) (single-ended) Physical port a Physical port c Log. Balanced Balanced port port port Physical port b Physical port d Imbalance 1 / Imbalance 2 Imbalance 1 selects the balanced logical port i as the input, the single-ended logical ports j and k as the output and calculates the following imbalance parameter: = –(S...
Page 284 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Stability Selects a stability factor as a measured quantity for the active trace. The stability factor calculation is based on 2-port reflection and transmission S-parameters so that the input and output port numbers must be different. The pull-down list contains all possi- ble physical (single-ended) port combinations.
Page 285 Selects the ranges for the DC voltages fed to the DC INPUT connectors at the rear panel as measured quantities and opens the PAE measurement dialog. The DC input connectors are available as option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-B81 (see Chapter 5.7.23, "DC Inputs",...
Page 286 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool 6.2.11.1 Controls on the DC Tab The "PAE..." button opens the Power Added Efficiency dialog. DC 1/DC 2/DC 3/DC 4/Source Port Selects a DC INPUT and the drive port for the active trace.
Page 287 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Meas Softtool Background information Refer to section Chapter 5.7.23.1, "Power Added Efficiency", on page 238. A PAE measurement involves the following steps: 1. Select the "Measurement Type", according to the properties of your DC power source.
Page 288 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PAE:TYPE Formula Shows the formula for the calculation of the DC supply power P , depending on the selected Measurement Type. The parameters R, U , and/or I must be entered in accordance with the properties with the DC power source and precision resistor in use.
Page 289 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Measured quantities and display formats The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities (see Chapter 6.2, "Meas Softtool", on page 255). Nevertheless, to extract useful infor- mation from the data, it is important to select a display format which is appropriate to the analysis of a particular measured quantity.
Page 290 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Phase Selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of a com- plex measured quantity in the range between –180 degrees and +180 degrees. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e.
Page 291 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat POLar Calculates the Standing Wave Ratio (SWR) from the measured quantity (typically a reflection S-parameter) and displays it in a Cartesian diagram. Properties: The SWR (or Voltage Standing Wave Ratio, VSWR) is a measure of the power reflected at the input of the DUT.
Page 292 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Lin Mag Selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis scale to display the magnitude of the measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the complex quantity C, i.e. |C| = sqrt ( Re(C)
Page 293 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Tip (alternative formats): It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
Page 294 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Format Softtool Aperture Points Defines an aperture Δf for the (group) "Delay" calculation. The value is entered as number of "Aperture Points" (i.e. sweep steps). Properties: The delay at each sweep point is computed as: meas where the aperture Δf is a finite frequency interval around the sweep point f...
Page 295 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool Δf is constant over the entire sweep range, if the sweep type is a Lin. Frequency sweep. For Log. Frequency and Segmented Frequency sweeps, it varies with the sweep point number m. Application: The aperture must be adjusted to the conditions of the measurement. A small aperture increases the noise in the group delay;...
Page 296 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool The "Scale Values" settings are closely related to the "Format" and "Display" settings. The "Scale Values" settings depend on the current trace format (diagram type) because not all diagrams can be scaled in the same way: ●...
Page 297 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool Auto Scale Trace Adjusts the "Scale/Div" and the "Ref Value" to display the entire active trace in the dia- gram area, leaving an appropriate display margin. ● In Cartesian diagrams, the analyzer recalculates the values of the vertical divisions so that the trace fits onto approx.
Page 298 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool ● In circular diagrams ("Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"), "Ref Value" defines the value of the outer circumference. Changing "Ref Value" enlarges or scales down the dia- gram, leaving the center unchanged. The unit is U (units) for all circular diagrams.
Page 299 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool The "Trace Manager..." button opens the Trace Manager Dialog. Couple All Traces / Couple Trc ... To Trace Applies the scale settings of the reference trace ("To Trace") to all traces / to the active trace.
Page 300 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Scale Softtool Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical/numerical zooming. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.3.6, "Scaling Diagrams", on page 64 ● Chapter 6.4.1, "Scale Values Tab", on page 295 ●...
Page 301 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Zoom Reset If a graphical zoom has been applied to the current diagram, this action resets the zoom area. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Overview On If a graphical zoom has been applied to the active diagram (and has not been reset, this button toggles the overview for this diagram.
Page 302 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other; see Chapter 7.3.2, "Active Traces in Remote Control", on page 755.
Page 303 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Add Tr+Diag Creates a trace in the active channel and assigns it to a new diagram. Otherwise behaves like Trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED Delete Trace Deletes the active trace and removes it from the diagram area. If the active diagram contains only one trace, the diagram is also deleted.
Page 304 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● "Disable all Disables all channels, except the active one ● other Measure- Disables all traces in the active channel, except the active one ● ments" Hides all diagrams except the active one "Enable all...
Page 305 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool All existing traces of the current recall set are listed in a table with several editable (white) or non-editable (gray) columns. Table Area The table contains the following columns: ● "Name" indicates name of the related trace.
Page 306 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool The default names for new traces are "Trc<n>", where <n> is selected by the analyzer firmware to make trace names unambiguous. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Delete Deletes the selected trace. This button is disabled if the recall set contains only one trace: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.
Page 307 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Coupling of data and memory traces When a memory trace is generated from a data trace, it is displayed in the same dia- gram area and inherits all channel and trace settings from the data trace. The memory trace displayed in the active diagram;...
Page 308 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Data to <Destination> Stores the current state of the active data trace to the Destination memory trace. No trace functions are applied to the stored trace. Tips: ● Data & Func to <Destination>...
Page 309 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool If no memory trace is associated with the active data trace, "Show <Mem>" is disabled. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:SHOW 6.5.3 All Mem All Data Tab Performs actions on all data or memory traces in the active recall set.
Page 310 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Destination Selects the destination for the All Data to <Destination> All Data & Func to <Desti- nation> functions, that operate on all data traces in the active recall set. ● "Mem": For each data trace with associated memory traces, the current trace data are cop- ied to the first associated memory trace, overwriting existing data.
Page 311 "Complex Data" math is available in all firmware versions of all R&S ZNx vector net- work analyzers. "Formatted Data" math was added in version 3.0 of the R&S ZNB/ ZNBT firmware. Trace Math ← Complex Data/Formatted Data Activates or deactivates the "Complex Data"...
Page 312 E.g., if no "User Defined" mathematical relation is defined, a memory trace must be coupled to the active data trace, so that the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can evaluate one of the relations "Data / <Mem>" or "Data - <Mem>".
Page 313 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Compatibility between traces in mathematical relations Mathematical traces are either constant functions or functions of one or more data or memory traces. They are calculated on a point-to-point basis. Each trace point no. i of the mathematical trace is calculated from a set of constant values c , ..., c...
Page 314 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Expression builder The mathematical expression appears in the upper part of the dialog. The operands and operators in the expression can be selected from a keyboard and the list of "Oper- ands": ●...
Page 315 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● In power sweeps, "StimVal" provides the voltage in V that results from the source power in dBm. To obtain the correct source power in dBm (for "dB Mag" trace for- mat), Result is Wave Quantity must be enabled.
Page 316 6.5.5 Time Domain Tab The "Time Domain" tab enables and configures the time domain representation of the measurement results. Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNB-K2 / R&S ZNBT-K2. If this option is not installed, the "Time Domain" and Time Gate Tab tabs are hidden.
Page 317 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool "Low Pass Settings..." opens the Low Pass Settings Dialog. Time Domain Selects the time domain representation for the active diagram area. The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep is active (see "Lin Freq"...
Page 318 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus Impulse Response Selects a window type which the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses to filter the trace in the fre- quency domain. The drop-down list shows the impulse response of a constant trace over a finite sweep range (i.e. a rectangular function) that was filtered using the differ- ent available window types.
Page 319 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool TD-VSWR Enables time domain site VSWR measurements (see Chapter 5.7.2.6, "Time Domain Measurements", on page 207). VSWR Remote command: CALCulate:TDVSwr[:STATe] Gate Span Time Domain S Measurements relies on a time gate that is centered at the anten-...
Page 320 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic? Set Harmonic Grid and Keep The three buttons provide alternative algorithms for calculation of a harmonic grid, based on the current sweep points. ● Keep "Stop Frequency and Number of Points" calculates a harmonic grid based on the current "Stop Frequency"...
Page 321 DUT without the contribution of the unwanted responses. The time gate is inde- pendent of the frequency window used to filter the trace before transforming it to time domain. Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNB-K2 / R&S ZNBT-K2. If this option is not installed, the Time Domain Tab and "Time Gate"...
Page 322 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Time Gate Enables or disables the time gate for the time domain and frequency domain traces. "Gat" is displayed in the trace list while the time gate is active. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe Axis Pair "Start Stop"...
Page 323 CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME[:TYPE] Shape Selects a gate shape which the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses to filter the trace in the time domain. The drop-down list visualizes how the time gate will affect a constant function after transformation back into the frequency domain. The selected window is applied to the active trace.
Page 324 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool 6.5.8.1 Controls on the Trace Statistics Tab The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range Dialog", on page 328). The "Decimal Places..." button opens the "System Config" dialog to define the (maxi- mum) number of fractional digits for setting values and measurement results.
Page 325 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool    i 1 Note: To calculate the "Min", "Max", "Pk-Pk" and the "Std Dev" values, the analyzer uses formatted response values y (see trace formats). Consequently, the mean value and the standard deviation of a trace depend on the selected trace format. In contrast, the "RMS"...
Page 326 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● "El Len" is the electrical length, which is the product of the phase delay times the speed of light in the vacuum. If no dispersion occurs, the phase delay is equal to the group delay. For more informa- tion, refer to Chapter 5.3.8, "Delay, Aperture, Electrical...
Page 327 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool The compression point is a measure for the upper edge of the linearity range of a DUT. It is close to the highest input signal level for which the DUT shows a linear response, so that the magnitude of all S-parameters remains constant).
Page 328 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:REFerence Selected Marker This button is only visible if "Selected Marker" is used as Reference Value. It allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation.
Page 329 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] > "Offset" > "Evaluation Range..." ● Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range. Up to 10 different ranges are available for each recall set. "Full Span" means that the search range is equal to the entire sweep range.
Page 330 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool ● The analyzer can export the raw complex (unformatted) data or formatted data. The unformatted data are independent of all "Smooth Shift Hold" settings; see "Formatted Values" on page 337. ● For complex traces, if marker format and trace format do not coincide, the marker...
Page 331 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Aperture Defines how many trace values are averaged to smooth the trace if Smoothing switched on. ∈ {1, ..., N} is replaced by An "Aperture" of a % means that the value at sweep point n the arithmetic mean of the values at sweep points ⌈...
Page 332 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Shift Trace Functions for shifting the active trace in horizontal and vertical direction. Stimulus ← Shift Trace Shifts the active trace in horizontal direction, leaving the positions of all markers unchanged. The unit of the offset value depends on the sweep type.
Page 333 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool "Real" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – Re(zr) "Imag" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – Im(zr) "Complex" Dyn_Shift(z) = z – zr Remote command: n.a. 6.5.10 Infinite Averaging Tab The controls on the "Infinite Averaging " tab allow you configure infinite averaging for the active trace.
Page 334 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 5.4.2, "Trace Files", on page 140. All buttons on the "Trace Data" tab serve as "openers" for related dialogs: ● "Import..." calls up a dialog to load a memory trace from a trace file; see Chap- ter 6.5.11.1, "Import Complex Data...
Page 335 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool On loading data from a trace file with several traces, the analyzer displays a dialog to select one or more of the traces stored in the file (see Chapter 6.5.11.3, "Select Param- eter Dialog",...
Page 336 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Data export can serve many purposes, e.g.: ● To process and evaluate measurement data in an external application. ● To store measurement data and reimport it in a future measurement session. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
Page 337 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with a number of additional buttons to specify the export options. Many options depend on the selected export file format ("Files of type"). The displayed controls change accordingly.
Page 338 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool The exported complex trace values are the values at the beginning of the trace data flow. None of the following stages (trace mathematics, shift, time domain gate, trace formatting and smoothing) affects the exported data. "Save" writes the raw stimulus values (frequency/power/time, according to the sweep type) and the raw, complex measurement points to a file.
Page 339 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Trace Config Softtool Access: The dialog may be called from several dialogs, for example on pressing "Open" in the Import Complex Data Dialog. Select All / Deselect All During trace data import, selects/deselects all traces contained in the opened trace file.
Page 340 Lines Softtool Checks and Messages in the Dialog After each port or channel selection, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT checks the channel data for compatibility with the trace export conditions. If data from "All Channels" are exported, every channel must contain a compatible set of traces; see "Conditions for Touchstone...
Page 341 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 5.4.1, "Limit Check", on page 133. 6.6.1 Limit Test Tab Defines limit lines for the measurement results (upper and lower limits), visualizes them in the diagrams and activates/deactivates the limit check.
Page 342 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool The limit line colors are defined in the Define User Color Scheme Dialog (SYSTEM > [DISPLAY] > "Config" > "Define User Color..."). You can choose between various options: ● Display upper and lower limit lines with different colors.
Page 343 No fail beep can be gen- erated if the limit check is switched off. Note: In contrast to the R&S ZNB, the R&S ZNBT does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the R&S ZNBT or operate it via remote desktop.
Page 344 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool ● "PASS" represents pass for all traces with enabled limit check. A trace without limit lines or with disabled individual limit check always passes the global check. ● "FAIL" means that the limit check for one or more traces failed.
Page 345 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Note: Default values "TTL1 Pass" / "TTL2 Pass" for new traces can be set in the "Advanced" tab of the "System Config" dialog (see "TTL Pass Default Values" on page 707). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe]...
Page 346 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle limit lines efficiently: ● To define limit lines with only a few segments, select "Add" and edit each segment...
Page 347 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line.
Page 348 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool ● "Import File..." opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file (see Chap- ter 6.5.11, "Trace Data Tab", on page 333). In case the selected file contains more than one trace, another popup dialog lets you select the adequate one: Imported traces are polygonal curves with n points and n –...
Page 349 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool For convenience, "Type", "Start Stimulus", "Stop Stimulus", and "Interpolation" are repeated from the Segment List of the "Define Limit Lines" dialog. Linear/Formula Allows you to decide how to define the line segment. ●...
Page 350 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool 6.6.2.1 Controls on the Ripple Test Tab The "Def. Ripple Test..." button opens the "Define Ripple Test" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.6.2.2, "Define Ripple Test Dialog", on page 352). Show Ripple Limits Shows or hides the ripple limit lines associated with the active trace in a Cartesian dia- gram area.
Page 351 No fail beep can be generated if the ripple limit check is switched off. Note: In contrast to the R&S ZNB, the R&S ZNBT does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the R&S ZNBT or operate it via remote desktop.
Page 352 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] Clear Test Resets the limit check results. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CLEar Global Check "Global Check" on page 343. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass" on page 344.
Page 353 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool The "Define Ripple Test" dialog contains a table to edit the individual ranges of the rip- ple check ranges. The buttons below the table extend, shorten, or reorder the range list and save/recall ripple test data.
Page 354 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Recall Ripple Test.../Save Ripple Test... The buttons open an Open/Save File dialog to load a ripple limit line from a ripple limit file or store the current ripple limit configuration to a file.
Page 355 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool The limit line colors are defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.16.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme Dialog", on page 690). You can choose between various options: ● Assign the same color to traces and associated limit lines.
Page 356 No fail beep can be gen- erated if the limit check is switched off. Note: In contrast to the R&S ZNB, the R&S ZNBT does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the R&S ZNBT or operate it via remote desktop.
Page 357 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Clear Test Resets the limit check results. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:CLEar Draw Circle Activates touchscreen or mouse operation; tap the diagram at one border of the limit circle and draw the circle to the required size and position.
Page 358 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Lines Softtool Show Border If enabled, the border of the Display Circle is shown whenever the related trace is dis- played in complex format. The border color can be modified by a user-defined color scheme (Element "Vertical...
Page 359 CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe Response Value Defines/shows the response value of the horizontal line. Tip: Use the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's drag and drop functionality to move the horizontal line to a particular position. The response value appears in the numeric entry field. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe...
Page 360 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool "Add Marker" adds a new marker. Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.2.1.3, "Markers", on page 94 ● Chapter 4.3.4, "Handling Diagrams, Traces, and Markers", on page 57 Mkr Stimulus / Ref Mkr Stimulus Gets/sets the stimulus value of the active marker.
Page 361 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence[:STATe] All Off Disables all markers of the active trace. Markers remember their "Marker Props" while disabled (see Chapter 6.7.2, "Marker Props Tab", on page 362). The marker properties are definitely lost when the associ- ated trace is deleted.
Page 362 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:Y Add Marker Adds a new marker to the active trace. Uses the next "free" marker number Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker Coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type"...
Page 363 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Marker Name Assigns a (new) name to the active marker. Marker names can contain letters, num- bers, blanks and special characters. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:NAME CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:NAME Marker Format Defines the formatting of the active marker in the movable marker info field.
Page 364 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool If in the current trace format the X axis represents the stimulus, the marker can be moved horizontally. Moving the marker adjusts the markers's stimulus value, but its response value remains fixed. Arbitrary: freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value.
Page 365 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Decimal Places... Opens the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config" dialog, which allows to define the (maximum) number of decimal digits for different units. See "User Interface Tab" on page 702. 6.7.3 Marker Search Tab Provides "Marker Search"...
Page 366 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute MINimum | MAXimum CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? Center = Marker "Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker" on page 378. Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum in the search range,...
Page 367 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Define an adequate "Search Range" to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power interval (see Chapter 6.7.3.2, "Search Range Dialog", on page 367). Note: Tracking for bandfilter search can be activated separately, see "Tracking"...
Page 368 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool "Search Range" properties The 10 search ranges are valid for the entire recall set. Each of them can be assigned to any marker in the recall set, irrespective of the trace and channel that the marker belongs to.
Page 369 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool ● TRACE – [MARKER] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..." Select Marker Allows you to select the related marker and to activate or deactivate it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Search Config Allows you to select the Target Search Mode of the selected marker.
Page 370 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool 6.7.4 Multiple Peak Tab "Multiple Peak" search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Background information Refer to "Basic Marker Search Functions" on page 99. 6.7.4.1 Controls on the Multiple Peak Tab...
Page 371 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool All Markers Off "All Off" on page 361. 6.7.4.2 Multiple Marker Config Dialog The "Multiple Marker Config" dialog allows you to configure the multiple peak searches for the active trace. Access: TRACE – [MARKER] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..."...
Page 372 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool 6.7.5 Target Search Tab The "Target Search" functions use markers to locate trace points with a specific response value ("Target Value"). The functions are unavailable if the active trace con- tains no markers (e.g. after "All Markers Off").
Page 373 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Target Format Description Formula "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "SWR" (Voltage) Standing Wave Ratio SWR = (1 + |z|) / (1 – |z|) "Default"...
Page 374 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Background information Refer to "Bandfilter Search" on page 99. Bandfilter for arbitrary scalar traces "Bandfilter" search can be used for a broad range of measured quantities (see Chap- ter 6.2, "Meas Softtool", on page 255). To obtain real filter parameters, the trace format must be "dB Mag", the measured quantity must be a transmission S-parameter and a...
Page 375 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth Bandpass Ref to Max Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking. The located bandpass region is the tallest peak in the search range with a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
Page 376 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BPASs CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe]:AREA Bandpass Ref to Mkr Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking, starting at the position of the active marker. A bandpass region is the closest peak in the evaluation range that has a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
Page 377 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BSTop CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter Result Off Hides the movable info field with the results of a bandpass or a bandstop search and disables Tracking. The info field is displayed again (and tracking re-enabled) when a new "Bandfilter"...
Page 378 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool 6.7.7 Set by Marker Tab The "Set by Marker" functions use the active marker to define the sweep range, scale the diagram and introduce an electrical length offset. The functions are unavailable if the active trace contains no markers (e.g.
Page 379 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool Ref Val = Marker / Max = Marker / Min = Marker The following functions use the response value of the active marker to scale the y-axis of the diagram: ● "Ref Val = Marker" sets the reference value equal to the response value of the active marker, leaving the values of the vertical divisions ("Scale / Div") unchanged.
Page 380 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Marker Softtool 6.7.9 Marker Coupling Tab Allows you to set up and control marker coupling. Background information Refer to "Marker Coupling" on page 98. Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker Coupling. The label indicates the selected...
Page 381 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE Reset Marker Coupling Convenience function for disabling marker coupling and setting the Coupling Type "All" (default). Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] OFF CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE ALL 6.8 Stimulus Softtool On the "Stimulus" softtool, you can access to the stimulus parameters of the active channel.
Page 382 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool The following "Stimulus" settings are also available on the "Power" tab: ● Power ● Start Power / Stop Power Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency Defines the sweep range for non-segmented frequency sweeps.
Page 383 The "Power" tab provides settings related to transmit and receive power. It is also dis- played on the "Power Bw Avg" softtool. 6.8.2.1 Controls on the Power Tab left = R&S ZNB with Receiver Step Attenuators and 4 physical ports right = R&S ZNB/ZNBT with Receiver Step Attenuators and >...
Page 384 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool Power Determines the output power at the test ports for the sweep types "Lin Freq", "Log Freq", "CW Mode", and "Time". Also determines the default output power for "Segmen- ted" sweeps, where the output power can be set per segment.
Page 385 6.8.3 Time Domain X-Axis Tab If the active trace is a time domain trace, these settings define its stimulus axis. Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNB-K2 / R&S ZNBT-K2. If this option is not installed, the "Time Domain X-Axis" tab is hidden.
Page 386 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Stimulus Softtool Figure 6-7: Stimulus > Time Domain X-Axis softtool tab left = Time representation right = Distance representation Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in time representation (see "Time /...
Page 387 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Power Bw Avg Softtool Remote command: n.a. "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span" on page 386. Time / Distance "Time" and "Distance" switch over between the x-axis scaling in time units or distance units.
Page 388 Hz (n ≥ 0). Values exceeding the maximum bandwidth are rounded down. Hz, 7 · 10 The regular bandwidth range is 1 Hz to 1 MHz. Option R&S ZNB-K17/R&S ZNBT-K17 enables bandwidths up to 10 MHz (see Chapter 5.7.5, "Receiver Bandwidth 10 MHz",...
Page 389 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Power Bw Avg Softtool ● "High" selectivity filters have the steepest edges and the longest settling times. This filter type is suitable for isolating adjacent signals which are separated by a small frequency spacing. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:SELect...
Page 390 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Factor / On / Reset "Factor" defines the number of averaged traces, "On" enables or disables the sweep average, "Reset" starts a new average cycle. The average cycle is also restarted when averaging mode is changed.
Page 391 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Segmented sweeps In "Segmented" linear frequency sweeps, the sweep parameters can be set independ- ently for each segment. See Chapter 6.10.2.2, "Define Segments Dialog", on page 399. System error correction In general, the system error correction is no longer valid after a change of the sweep parameters.
Page 392 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool See also Chapter 5.1.4, "Sweep Control", on page 82. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:POINts Freq Step Size Sets the distance between two consecutive sweep points of a linear frequency sweep. For linear frequency sweeps the step size is an alternative to the...
Page 393 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Meas Delay Adds a delay time before the start of every partial measurement. See Chapter 5.1.4.1, "Partial Measurements and Driving Mode", on page 83 . "Meas Delay" is not available while a "Time" or "CW Mode" sweep is active.
Page 394 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:GENeration [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:GENeration:ANALog:CONDition? 6.10.2 Sweep Type Tab Defines the sweep variable (frequency/power/time) and the position of the sweep points across the sweep range. 6.10.2.1 Controls on the Sweep Type Tab Lin Freq In a linear frequency sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range.
Page 395 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
Page 396 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Sweep segments can overlap. The segment list must contain at least 2 distinct fre- quency points before a segmented frequency sweep can be started. Instrument settings such as the internal generator power, the measurement (IF) band- width, and the frequency band of the local oscillator can be set independently for the individual segments.
Page 397 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POWer CW Mode "CW Mode" sweeps, like Time sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 6.8.1, "Stim- ulus Tab",...
Page 398 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Time "Time" sweeps, like CW Mode sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 6.8.1, "Stim- ulus Tab", on page 381). A single sweep extends over a specified period of time, defined via the "Stop Time"...
Page 399 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ● In "Point based" mode, the x-axis shows all sweep points with equal spacings. Gaps between sweep segments are minimized; no diagram space is "wasted" on unused frequency ranges. Point-based mode is indicated in the channel line.
Page 400 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ● Sweep segments are allowed to overlap. ● In contrast to standard frequency sweeps, the start and stop frequency in a sweep segment must not be different. So with a segmented sweep you can measure n...
Page 401 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. ● "Add" adds a new segment to the end of the list.
Page 402 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Import.../ Export... The buttons open standard dialogs to import/export sweep segment settings to/from an ASCII file (*.SegList). ● "Import..." replaces the current segment list by a sweep segment list loaded from a *.SegList file.
Page 403 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 6.10.2.2, "Define Segments Dialog", on page 399 ● "Show Point List..." on page 401 Optional Columns Each selected (checked) option adds a column to the segment list and the point list.
Page 404 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool 18, 19; see Chapter 11.3.1.1, "USER PORT", on page 1425). The output signals are 3.3 V TTL signals which can be used to differentiate between up to 16 inde- pendent analyzer states. For an application example, refer to the detailed remote control description (OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:SEGMent<Seg>[:VALue]).
Page 405 83. Output trigger The R&S ZNB/ZNBT provides a configurable output trigger signal to synchronize exter- nal devices with the measurement. This signal is available at the rear panel connector EXT TRIG OUT. Configuration of the output trigger signal is a remote control feature (TRIGger:CHANnel<Ch>:AUXiliary...
Page 406 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool The following buttons in the "Trigger" tab open related dialogs: ● "Trigger Manager...": Trigger Manager Dialog FreeRun / External / Manual / Multiple Triggers These four buttons select the trigger source: ● In "FreeRun" mode, a new measurement is started immediately without waiting for a trigger event and without fixed time reference.
Page 407 Note: The trigger events must be adjusted to the triggered measurement sequence. If the analyzer receives a trigger event while the last sequence is still running, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT skips the trigger event and generates a message. Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:LINK...
Page 408 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff Signal Type Specifies the "External" trigger mode in detail. ● "Rising Edge"/"Falling Edge" means that the rising/falling slope of every external trigger pulse can trigger a single measurement sequence. ●...
Page 409 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool ... /Source/ ... The table defines all settings related to "Multiple Triggers" (see Chapter 6.10.3, "Trig- Tab", on page 405). For all measurement sequences the following trigger sources are available: ● "Free Run" means that a trigger signal is not required ●...
Page 410 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool 6.10.4.1 Controls on the Sweep Control Tab Continuous / Single Activate either continuous or single sweep mode for the active channel. ● In "Continuous" mode, the analyzer measures continuously, repeating the current sweep.
Page 411 "All Channels Continuous": The R&S ZNB/ZNBT continuously repeats the sweeps in all channels. ● "All Channels on Hold": The R&S ZNB/ZNBT performs single sweeps, according to the channel-specific number of "Sweeps". These actions are only available for the DEFAULT Remote Language).
Page 412 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Sweep Softtool Sweep Stage Sweep Controller Display in "Continuous" Sweep in "Single" Sweep Mode Mode Sweeping m/n if n = #Sweeps > 1 Measurement results are being calculated Continuous Calculation Calculation The VNA is sweeping or waits for a trigger signal.
Page 413 Access: CHANNEL – [CAL] 6.11.1 Start Cal Tab The "Start Cal" tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration. Calibration of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is a fully guided process. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
Page 414 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 6.11.1.1 Controls on the Start Cal Tab ● The "Start Auto Cal" and "Start... (Cal Unit)" buttons are only active if a calibration unit is connected to the analyzer. ● If there is more than one channel in the current recall set at the time you initiate a...
Page 415 ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool If the active recall set contains several channels, an "Info" box lets you decide whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT acquires calibration data for the active channel or for all channels. SMARTerCal – Start... (Cal Unit) Depending on the Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard setting, the "Start...
Page 416 (along with its characterization). Step 2: Connections allows you to define the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration unit. Step 3: Cal Unit guides you through the required measurements on the standards provided by the calibration unit. Finally, you can either apply the resulting error terms to the related channels, or discard them.
Page 417 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-10: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports Figure 6-11: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation.
Page 418 See Chapter 6.11.2.3, "Characterize Cal Unit Dialog", on page 483. By default, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses the last generated cal unit characterization. Tip: If the characterization wizard is password-protected, the "Characterization" button is unavailable. Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations.
Page 419 ● The selected characterization data do not contain all standards needed for the selected calibration type. Step 2: Connections Defines the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration unit. Background information Refer to: ● Chapter 5.5.5.4, "Multiple Port Assignments",...
Page 420 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-12: Calibration Unit wizard, step 2: Connections Figure 6-13: Calibration Unit wizard, step 2: Connections (>4 test ports and multiple port assign- ments) If multiple port assignments are required and "Use Reduced Number of Through"...
Page 421 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment<Asg>:DEFine:TPORt [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:COUNt? Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNB/ZNBT (with a little help from the attached calibration unit) auto-detects the connected ports. The automatic assignment replaces the configured one. If auto-detection fails because of a high attenuation in the signal path, you can either enter the port assignment manually or connect matching port numbers and select "Default Port Assignment".
Page 422 After all these calibration steps have been completed, the resulting system error cor- rection can be calculated and applied. In the upper part of the "Cal Unit" screen, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT shows the calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part visualizes the active port assignment and the measurement progress.
Page 423 Performs the "Detect Port Assignment" and "Start Cal Sweep" functions, one after the other. Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNB/ZNBT (with a little help from the attached calibration unit) auto-detects the connected ports. The automatic assignment replaces the configured one.
Page 424 1. "Ports": Allows you to define the system error corrections (test ports, calibration unit, characterization, calibration type). 2. "Connections": Allows you to define the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ ZNBT and the calibration unit or units. 3. "Cal Unit": Allows you to acquire measurement data for the selected port assign- ments and the required calibration standards (provided by the calibration unit).
Page 425 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool culates the system error correction data (error terms) from the measurement data and applies the result to the active channel. Background and related information ● The "Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard" feature is disabled by default and has to be...
Page 426 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Access: Calibration Unit Wizard (MultiCal), Step 1: "Ports" > "Add..." / "Modify..." ● The "Multiple Cal in Calibration Wizard" (MultiCal) feature is disabled by default and has to be activated in the Calibration Tab of the "System Config"...
Page 427 See Chapter 6.11.2.3, "Characterize Cal Unit Dialog", on page 483. By default, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses the last generated cal unit characterization. Tip: If the characterization wizard is password-protected, the "Characterization" button is unavailable. Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations.
Page 428 485. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:TYPE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:TYPE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CONFigure Step 2: Connections Defines the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration unit. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.5.5.4, "Multiple Port Assignments", on page 171 for details on multi- ple port assignments.
Page 429 ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 3: Cal Unit During the calibration phase, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT displays a "Cal Unit" screen that guides the user through the correction data acquisition. Same logic as in the single calibration version of the wizard (see "Step 3: Cal Unit"...
Page 430 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available: Figure 6-17: Calibration Presetting: Ports and Type (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated.
Page 431 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The way the analyzer fimware activates/deactivates ports after a successfull calibration (system error correction or power calibration) has slightly changed: ● In all FW releases, calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single-ended logical ports.
Page 432 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Selects the connector type and gender for all ports and allows you to import a calibra- tion kit. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.5.2, "Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits",...
Page 433 The assignment of a calibration kit to a connector type must be the same for all physi- cal ports: If a calibration kit is changed, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT automatically assigns the new kit to all ports with the same connector type.
Page 434 Allows you to acquire error correction data for every required port (pair) and calibration standard, where "required" depends on the selected ports and calibration type. On "Apply", the R&S ZNB/ZNBT calculates the system error correction (error terms) from the measurement data of the standards and applies the result to the active channel.
Page 435 Cal Softtool Figure 6-20: Calibration Setting Wizard, Step 3: Calibration In the upper part of the "Calibration" screen, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT shows the sweep dia- grams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part displays the calibrated ports and standards and visualizes the measurement progress.
Page 436 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-21: Multiple traces due to multiple paths The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
Page 437 If active, only the selected trace is refreshed. ● If inactive, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT permanently refreshes all traces of all diagrams which can put a heavy load on the connected switch matrices (if any). Hence it is recommended (and default) to activate it, in particular if one of the matrices uses mechanical switches (that wear off apart from making noise).
Page 438 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Note: Checks during the calculation of correction data Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate. The analyzer auto-detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes.
Page 439 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Adds a new system error correction. The "Add" button opens the Define Calibration Dialog without pre-selected ports. Delete Deletes the selected calibration from the list of configured calibrations. Modify Edits the selected system error correction: opens the...
Page 440 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The layout of the dialog panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 6-22: Define Calibration dialog (manual, > 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation.
Page 441 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool the balanced port was dissolved and only the uncalibrated (single-ended) port was disabled. In earlier FW versions there was no such port deactivation mechanism. ● Since FW version 2.40 an uncalibrated port is only disabled if it is not used by a measurement, i.e.
Page 442 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The upper part of the panel shows the previously configured calibrations. Select the appropriate one to get access to the related ports. For the individual calibrations, the functionality is the same as described for the "SingleCal" version of the wizard (see "Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits"...
Page 443 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Screen Elements From top to bottom, the screen consists of the following elements. Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram in the upper part of the screen shows the progress of the calibration and the accuracy of a completed calibration ("Verification"). The diagram is scaled in "dB Mag"...
Page 444 Flatness" calibration can be performed. ● If a "SMARTerCal" is active, additional receiver power calibrations are not allowed and the R&S ZNB/ZNBT only offers the possibility to perform "Source Flatness" calibrations of the related test ports: Chapter 5.5.7.3, "Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration",...
Page 445 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:DATA:PORT<PhyPt> [SENSe<Chn>:]CORRection:PSTate? Power Cal Dialog (Ref. Receiver) In Ref. Receiver mode, the "Power Cal" dialog guides you through a reference receiver calibration. The selected source port is displayed with its cal power settings (see Chapter 6.11.3.2,...
Page 446 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Calibrate Only Port Frequency Frequency Conversion Measurements, by default the reference receivers are cali- brated for all resulting frequencies – even if they are currently not relevant for some ports. Using this switch, you can limit the calibrated frequencies to those frequencies that are required for the related port, which results in shorter calibration times.
Page 447 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool "Source Port" defines the type of measurement receiver calibration: ● If the source port is equal to the calibrated port, the measurement receiver is cali- brated by the wave that is reflected back by a connected Open or Short standard.
Page 448 1. "Ports": Select the calibrated ports, the cal unit characterization and the calibra- tion type. 2. "Connections": a) Define the port assignment between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration unit. b) Select one of the calibrated ports for power calibration.
Page 449 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 3. "SMARTerCal": a) Acquire measurement data for all required standards for the selected system error calibration type. b) Apply the calculated error terms to the active channel. c) Acquire the power calibration data at the selected source port.
Page 450 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-23: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports Figure 6-24: SMARTerCal (Cal Unit), Step 1: Ports (> 4 Ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 451 See Chapter 6.11.2.3, "Characterize Cal Unit Dialog", on page 483. By default, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses the last generated cal unit characterization. Tip: If the characterization wizard is password-protected, the "Characterization" button is unavailable. Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations.
Page 452 The selected characterization data do not cover all the ports to be calibrated. ● The selected characterization data do not contain all standards needed for the selected calibration type. Step 2: Connections Defines the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration unit. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 453 The "Connections" step allows you to configure the assignments between VNA ports and calibration unit ports manually. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT always proposes an optimum solution (minimum number of assignments) that also minimizes the physical port reconnections required between calibration stages. For user-modified assignments, it provides assistive information indicating insufficient, or redundant entries.
Page 454 SMARTerCal. If the configured port assignments are invalid, this action is disabled. Step 3: SMARTerCal In the final step, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT displays a "SMARTerCal" screen that guides the user through the calibration data acquisition. 1. For each port assignment: a) Connect the calibration unit to the related set of test ports.
Page 455 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 2. Finally: a) Replace the calibration unit by the power meter. b) Start the power calibration sweep. The upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part dis- plays the power meter connection.
Page 456 Performs the "Detect Port Assignment" and "Start Cal Sweep" functions, one after the other. Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNB/ZNBT (with a little help from the attached calibration unit) auto-detects the connected ports. The automatic assignment replaces the configured one.
Page 457 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? Apply Is enabled when sufficient data have been acquired for the calibrated ports and stand- ards and for the power meter. The button starts the calculation of the calibration data and closes the calibration wizard.
Page 458 GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 2. "Connections": Define the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration units. 3. "SMARTerCal": a) For each configured SMARTerCal and port assignment, acquire error correc- tion data for the required calibration standards (provided by the selected cali- bration unit).
Page 459 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Modify Edits the selected system error correction: opens the Define Calibration Dialog with the corresponding ports and calibration type pre-selected. Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections. Inactive as long as no SMARTerCal is defined.
Page 460 See Chapter 6.11.2.3, "Characterize Cal Unit Dialog", on page 483. By default, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses the last generated cal unit characterization. Tip: If the characterization wizard is password-protected, the "Characterization" button is unavailable. Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations.
Page 461 Select All/Deselect All Selects/deselects all ports. These buttons are only shown if more than 4 ports are available. Step 2: Connections Defines the port assignments between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and the calibration unit. Related information Refer to Chapter 5.5.5.4, "Multiple Port Assignments",...
Page 462 If the configured port assignments are invalid, this action is disabled. Step 3: SMARTerCal In the final step, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT displays a "SMARTerCal" screen that guides the user through the calibration data acquisition. The logic is identical to that of the single calibration case (see "Step 3: SMARTerCal"...
Page 463 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool a) Acquire error correction data for the required ports and port pairs, and the required standards. b) Acquire source power calibration data at the "Power Port". c) Finally, decide whether to apply the resulting calibration.
Page 464 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-29: SMARTerCal (Manual), Step 1: Ports and Type The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 6-30: SMARTerCal(Manual), Step 1: Ports and Type (>4 ports)
Page 465 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. It is possible to select any combination of two or more test ports. If you are only inter- ested in a single port p, perform a two-port SMARTerCal for a port pair including p (as Power Port).
Page 466 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Selects the connector type and gender for all ports and allows you to import a calibra- tion kit. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.5.2, "Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits",...
Page 467 The assignment of a calibration kit to a connector type must be the same for all physi- cal ports: If a calibration kit is changed, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT automatically assigns the new kit to all ports with the same connector type.
Page 468 On "Apply", the R&S ZNB/ZNBT calculates the system error correction (error terms) from the measurement data of the standards and uses the power meter result to cor- rect the absolute receiver powers.
Page 469 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The upper part of the calibration screen presents ● calibration sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter during stand- ards measurement, ● power trace diagrams during the power calibration sweep The lower part displays the calibrated port (pairs) with their related measurements and visualizes the measurement progress.
Page 470 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
Page 471 Cal Softtool ● If inactive, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT permanently refreshes all traces of all diagrams which can put a heavy load on the connected switch matrices (if any). Hence it is recommended (and default) to activate it, in particular if one of the matrices uses mechanical switches (that wear off apart from making noise).
Page 472 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 1: Ports and Type The first page of the wizard presents the list of already configured SMARTerCals and allows you to: ● "Add" new SMARTerCals ● "Delete" or "Modify" existing SMARTerCals Adds a new SMARTerCal.
Page 473 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Figure 6-34: Define Calibration dialog (SMARTerCal) The layout of the main panel depends on the number of test ports available. Figure 6-35: Define Calibration dialog (SMARTerCal, >4 ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated.
Page 474 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool the balanced port was dissolved and only the uncalibrated (single-ended) port was disabled. In earlier FW versions there was no such port deactivation mechanism. ● Since FW version 2.40 an uncalibrated port is only disabled if it is not used by a measurement, i.e.
Page 475 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Back Go back to Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits. Start Start Step 3: Calibration. Step 3: Calibration Allows you to acquire error correction data for every required port (pair) and calibration standard, plus power correction data from the power meter.
Page 476 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 6.11.2.1 Cal Connector Types Dialog The "Cal Connector Types" dialog displays and modifies the list of available connector types. Cal connector types must be selected in accordance with the connectors of the measured DUT.
Page 477 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool ● The calculation of impedance and admittance parameters (see Chapter 5.3.3, "Impedance Parameters", on page 119 and Chapter 5.3.4, "Admittance Parame- ters", on page 123). Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection Line Type / Rel. Permittivity εr / Cutoff Freq. fc "Line Type"...
Page 478 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete 6.11.2.2 Calibration Kits Dialog The "Calibration Kits" dialog shows the available calibration kits for the different con- nector types. It is also used for cal kit and cal kit file management.
Page 479 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Controls in the Calibration Kits Dialog Connector Type The "Connector Type" table displays the available cal kit connector types. Select a row in this table to get the list of Available Cal Kits.
Page 480 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:DMODe [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:DELete Query connector types and calibration kits: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:CATalog? Import Cal Kit... / Export Cal Kit... The buttons below the "Connector Type" list are used to store cal kit data to a file and to reload previously stored cal kit files.
Page 481 ".s1p File" and ".s2p File" define whether the characteristics of the standard are described by a Touchstone file rather than by a circuit model from which the R&S ZNB/ZNBT can calculate the S-parameters. See "Read .s1p File... / Read .s2p File..."...
Page 482 Read .s1p File... / Read .s2p File... Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a Touchstone file containing the reflection or transmission S-parameters for the standard. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses the imported S-parameters rather than the circuit model to characterize the standard, if ".s1p File"/".s2p File"...
Page 483 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The offset parameters depend on whether the circuit model is defined as "Agilent Model" (see Chapter 6.11.2.1, "Cal Connector Types Dialog", on page 476): ● In an "Agilent Model", a calibration standard is characterized by its "Delay" (in s), its characteristic impedance "Z0"...
Page 484 Controls in the Characterize Cal Unit Dialog Calibration Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT auto-detects all calibra- tion units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connec- ted, one of them must be selected for characterization (active cal unit).
Page 485 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Characterization Data Displays all characterizations which are stored on the active cal unit. The "Factory" characterization is available for all calibration units; it ensures an accurate calibration for all standard applications. Characterizations stored on an SD card (inserted at the cal unit) are prefixed with "SD:".
Page 486 "Take OSM" starts a calibration sweep for the related port. "Take All OSM and Through" initiates a series of calibration sweeps; the R&S ZNB/ZNBT acquires a full set of one-port and two-port data. The latter is required for the transmission normaliza- tions and for a "One Path Two Ports"...
Page 487 Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT 6.11.3 Pwr Cal Settings Tab Gives access to all functions for power meter and power calibration data handling (transmission coefficients). Power calibration of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is a fully menu- guided process. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 488 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Efficient power calibration procedure ● For standard applications, open the "Start Cal" tab and select "Scalar Power Cal" – "Power Cal..." to perform the necessary calibration sweeps with default power cali- bration settings. You do not need any of the buttons in the "Pwr Cal Settings" tab.
Page 489 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Flatness Cal – Max Iterations Sets a limit for the number of calibration sweeps. See also "Calibration procedure" on page 175. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:NREadings SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:COLLect:AVERage[:COUNt] Flatness Cal – Tolerance Defines the maximum deviation of the measured power from the cal power. The cali- bration procedure is stopped if "Max Iterations"...
Page 490 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the power meter; see "Zeroing" on page 242. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<Pmtr>:AZERo 6.11.3.2 Modify Cal Power Dialog The "Modify Cal Power" dialog adjusts the target power for the power calibration (cal power) and defines the target power for the reference receiver calibration.
Page 491 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Port Overview ← Port Cal Power The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyzer. Each port is displayed with the current "Power Result" at the input of the DUT (in dBm) and offset (i.e. the "Cal Power Offet"...
Page 492 Cal Softtool Reference Receiver Cal Power Defines the source power the R&S ZNB/ZNBT uses to perform the first calibration sweep of the source power calibration. In this first sweep, the power meter reading is used to calibrate the reference receiver of the calibrated port. The following calibration sweeps are based solely on the reference receiver (see "Calibration procedure"...
Page 493 Transmission coefficients are interpolated between the frequency points and extrapolated, if necessary. If no transmission coefficient is defined at all, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT assumes a 0 dB attenuation across the entire frequency range. This assumption is equivalent to an ideal through connection or selecting "No Coefficients"...
Page 494 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:COUNt? SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>[: DUMMy] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>: Get Trace... Opens a selection box containing all traces in the active recall set. The "dB Mag" val- ues of the selected trace are used to define the transmission coefficients. Notice that if you combine different channels with different sweep points, the analyzer possibly has to interpolate or extrapolate the transmission coefficients.
Page 495 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool 6.11.4.1 Controls on the Use Cal Tab The buttons in the "Use Cal" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Scalar Power Cal" – "Active Power Cals...": Active Power Cals Dialog ● "Manage Cals" – "Cal Manager...": See...
Page 496 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Note: Disable the load match correction if your test setup or DUT is not suited for reverse sweeps or if you want to gain speed. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:GAIN:LMCorrection Scalar Power Cal – All Power Cals On / All Power Cals Off Activates or deactivates all scalar power calibrations in the active channel.
Page 497 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool All possible power calibrations can be performed from the Power Cal Wizard. Port Overview Shows all source ports together with their possible power calibrations. Unavailable cali- brations (i.e. calibrations that have not been performed yet) are grayed out.
Page 498 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Channel State The "Channel State" table shows all channels in the active recall set together with their current calibration. Channels can use either the active channel calibration (if available), a previously stored user correction data or the factory system error correction (indica- ted as '--').
Page 499 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool For channels that are linked to a "Cal Group" (using "Apply" or "Apply to All"), a new calibration overwrites the cal group data and hence affects all channels that are also linked to this cal group. An "Overwrite Warning" is displayed in this case. To continue with the calibration, confirm by using button "Overwrite Current File?"...
Page 500 The controls on the "METAS Cal" tab allow you to set up the instrument for real-time measurement uncertainty analysis. It is only visible if option R&S ZNB-K50 "Measure- ment Uncertainty Analysis" and METAS VNA Tools (version 2.2.3 or higher) are instal- led on the instrument.
Page 501 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool METAS Cal Active After a successful METAS calibration, this checkbox enables or disables the uncer- tainty calculation for the related channel. ● If enabled, measurement results and uncertainties are calculated by METAS VNA Tools.
Page 502 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool The exported ZIP file also contains the characterizations of the standards that were used for calibration and verification. The characterization data are kept as static resources in the METAS VNA Tools database. In summary, the exported ZIP file includes everything that is required to perform an offline analysis using any METAS VNA Tools installation, not only the one on the VNA.
Page 503 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Only calibration types supported by METAS VNA Tools are available. Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The way the analyzer fimware activates/deactivates ports after a successfull calibration (system error correction or power calibration) has slightly changed: ●...
Page 504 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Connector/Gender Specifies the connector and gender of the ports selected in Step 1: Ports and Type. Note that METAS compatible file formats do not contain information about the related connector type, so you have to make sure to choose a suitable Kit.
Page 505 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Same Connector all Ports/Same Gender all Ports "Same Connector All Ports / Same Gender All Ports" on page 433. Import Cal Kit... Opens the "Import Calibration Standards with Uncertainties" dialog, that allows you to import cal kits with (or without) uncertainties.
Page 506 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool On "Apply", the raw calibration data are transferred to METAS VNA Tools, which take over the calculation of measurement results and uncertainties: METAS Cal Active enabled automatically. In parallel to the "METAS Calibration", a regular VNA calibration without uncertainties is created.
Page 507 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool A "Verification Kit with Uncertainties" is a ZIP file containing verification standard char- acterizations in a format supported by METAS VNA Tools (sdatb, sdatx, sdatcv). See the document "Data Formats" on the METAS VNA Tools internet page (https:// www.metas.ch/metas/en/home/fabe/hochfrequenz/vna-tools.html, section "VNA Tools"...
Page 508 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Cal Softtool Collapse In collapsed state, the "METAS Verification" dock widget presents a condensed view, focusing on the verification results for the available verification standards. Save Verification Data Same as Export Data to METAS VNA Tools.
Page 509 For uniqueness, a timestamp is always appended. 6.12 Channel Config Softtool The "Channel Config" functions select, create and delete channels, configure the source and receive ports of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, and optimize the measurement proc- ess. Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] hardkey...
Page 510 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 6.12.1 Channels Tab Allows you to create and delete channels, to modify the channel state, and to select a channel as the active channel. You can monitor the channel activity using the com- OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt[:VALue]...
Page 511 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool The order of all channels in a recall set is given by the channels' creation time. By default, the channels are named Ch1, Ch2, ... so that Ch<n – 1> precedes Ch<n>. This order is always maintained, even if channels are renamed, invisible (because no traces are assigned to them) or distributed over several diagram areas.
Page 512 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Copy Channel + Diagram Copies the active channel with all its settings (including a possible channel calibration) and traces, and displays the created traces in a new diagram area. The new channel is named Ch<n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one.
Page 513 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 5.1.3.3, "Active and Inactive Traces and Channels", on page 82. Channel table The rows and columns of the channel table represent the existing channels (rows) together with certain editable (white) or non-editable (gray) properties (columns).
Page 514 ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool If the R&S ZNB is equipped with variant 02 of the extension board, a slightly different user interface is shown. The "Measurement" columns are hidden and the remaining content of the RFFE and GPIO tab are presented on a single "Control" tab.
Page 515 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Sweep Sequencer Tab Gives access to the "Sweep Sequencer" functionality, see Chapter 6.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 521. GPIOs Tab The "GPIOs" tab is split into two parts: ● The left part of the table area (up to column "Output Voltage") allows you to define and apply the GPIO pin voltages (see "Basic GPIO Configuration"...
Page 516 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 6.12.1.4 RFFE Interface Configuration Access: RFFE Tab of the "RFFE Config" dialog Basic RFFE Interface Settings and Command Execution The RFFE config table gives access to the channel-specific setup of the two RFFE bus interfaces RFFE1 and RFFE2.
Page 517 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool In this dialog, enter the following parameters (according to the device to be controlled): ● "SA": a slave address between 0 and 15 as 1 hex digit ● "CMD": a command number between 0 and 255 as 2 hex digits ●...
Page 518 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool ● The measurement parameters are channel-specific. However only one configura- tion can be measured at a time. ● Voltage and current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins are only possible with Var. 03 of the extension board R&S ZN-B15/Z15 (part number 1323.9355.03 or 1325.5905.03).
Page 519 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Start Meas Starts the voltage and current measurement. Note that "Start Meas" does not automatically activate the "Output Voltage" and "Range" / "Shunt" settings of the current channel. Use to activate them manually.
Page 520 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] Voltage / Output Voltage Sets the (default) voltage of the respective GPIO pin for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var. 02 / Var. 03. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>:VOLTage[:DEFault] Apply Use the "Apply" button to activate the configured voltage (and...
Page 521 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Range / Shunt "Range" defines an upper bound of the current to be measured on the respective GPIO pin. The analyzer firmware automatically selects a suitable shunt resistance. Possible ranges for ports 1 to 8 are { 2·10 μA | n=1,...,5 }.
Page 522 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool ● Make sure that the required RFFE bus interfaces and GPIO ports are enabled by setting the respective "Seq." flags in the "RFFE Config" dialog (see "Basic RFFE Interface Settings and Command Execution"...
Page 523 "Arb" and the selected stimulus axis are displayed in the chan- nel line. The arbitrary port configuration is part of the "Frequency Conversion Measurements" option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. If this option is not equipped, the "Port Config" Tab is not available. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.4, "Frequency Conversion...
Page 524 512), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inac- tive (grayed out). Port Settings... Opens a dialog that allows you to configure the source and receiver ports of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT for arbitrary frequencies, source and receiver levels: see Chap- ter 6.12.2.2, "Port Settings Dialog", on page 525.
Page 525 The "Port Settings" dialog is an example of a Multi-channel Setup Dialog. For the selected channel, it configures the source and receiver ports of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT for arbitrary frequencies, source and receiver levels. Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Port Config" > "Port Settings..."...
Page 526 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool appears in the channel line. "Reset" plus "Apply" or "OK" deactivates the arbitrary mode. Channel base frequency After a Reset, all port frequencies are set to the channel base frequency f . For fre- quency sweeps, f corresponds to the unmodified sweep range.
Page 527 This cell is only enabled, if the analyzer is equipped with option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. The result is displayed in the "Frequency Result" column. A red "Freq. Conversion" cell indicates that certain hardware limits are exceeded.
Page 528 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Modify Frequency Conversion Dialog The "Modify Frequency Conversion" dialog defines a port-specific frequency formula (for frequency sweeps) or CW frequency (for power, time and CW Mode sweeps). Access: Port Settings Dialog > "Arb Frequency" tab > "Freq. Conversion" cells...
Page 529 SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<PhyPt>:CONVersion:ARBitrary:IFRequency SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<PhyPt>:CONVersion:ARBitrary:EFRequency<Gen> [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:ARBitrary:PMETer<Pmtr> Arbitrary Power Tab Configures the source ports of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT for port-specific powers. Channel base power After a Reset, all source port powers are set to the channel base power P . For power sweeps, P corresponds to the unmodified sweep range.
Page 530 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Non-editable table columns In addition to the test ports ("Port"), the source ports include all configured external generators ("Gen"). Each port is displayed with its port number and device type ("Info"). For each port, the available power range and resulting port power are calculated from the configured power conversion and source attenuation settings.
Page 531 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool The control elements in the "Modify Cal Power" dialog are described in the following sections: ● "Channel Base Power" on page 491 ● "Port Power Offset" on page 491 ● "Cal Power Offset"...
Page 532 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Common Controls Modified "Port Settings" take effect on "Apply" or "OK". Use "Cancel" to discard possi- ble changes. Reset Resets the "Freq. Conversion" and "Power Conversion" settings of all ports. After "Reset", an "Apply" or "OK" terminates the arbitrary mode.
Page 533 6.12.2.3 Define Parallel Measurement Dialog With the R&S ZNBT or a 4-port R&S ZNB with internal second source, you can mea- sure multiple DUTs (or multiple paths of a single DUT) in parallel. The "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog allows you to configure these DUTs and to declare the connec- tions between physical VNA ports and DUT ports.
Page 534 R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool A R&S ZNB/ZNBT with two internal sources allows parallel measurements with "Fre- quency Offset", which can be configured in the corresponding tab on the right. Figure 6-40: Define Parallel Measurement (R&S ZNB) For the R&S ZNBT, the table and controls in the lower left part allow you to define the available DUTs along with their physical ports.
Page 535 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-41: Define Parallel Measurement (R&S ZNBT with 24 ports) ● Modified settings are not applied unless the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog is closed with the "OK" button. ● On "OK", any pre-existing logical port configuration is overwritten.
Page 536 Select "Delete". Modify an existing DUT The DUT table allows you to rename an existing DUT (R&S ZNB and R&S ZNBT) and to define its physical ports and drive port order (R&S ZNBT only). 1. Locate the related row in the DUT table.
Page 537 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool a) In the DUT perspective, toggle select the DUT port you want to connect or reconnect. b) In the "DUT Definition" tab, toggle select the VNA port you want to connect to the selected DUT port.
Page 538 "Minimum Offset" between the stimuli. To get access to the "Frequency Offset" configuration, create multiple DUTs (on the R&S ZNB set "Parallel Measurement" to "Enabled") and activate the "Frequency Off- set" tab. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 539 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool It is essential to perform the calibration with the same "Frequency Offset" settings as for the actual measurement; otherwise the calibration is deactivated ("Cal Off"). If there is a mismatch, the Calibration Manager Dialog provides additional information.
Page 540 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool The generated error code can be retrieved via remote control command SOURce<Ch>:GROup:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:CONDition?. The configuration problems listed above are indicated as error codes -8 "invalid offset or frequency spac- ing" and -6 "no simultaneous mode possible".
Page 541 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool The "Driving Mode" setting is also used during a system error correction. For channels which require a single partial measurement only, the driving mode settings are equiva- lent. See also Chapter 5.1.4.1, "Partial Measurements and Driving Mode",...
Page 542 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool For a wide bandpass, the spurious response flattens the filter edges. The spurious signal can be eliminated by dividing the sweep range into two segments with different LO settings: ● In the low-frequency segment ranging up to the center frequency of the bandpass filter, the frequency of the local oscillator is set to LO <...
Page 543 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Manual Config... The "Manual Config..." button opens the AGC Manual Configuration Dialog that allows to configure the GC for the individual sweep segments, drive ports and receivers. This button is enabled in "Manual"...
Page 544 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol:ALL Drive-port specific settings "Drive Port", "a", "b<j>": Selects the AGC mode for the respective drive port, a and b wave and receivers. "Auto" (column): Enables the automatic mode for the corresponding drive port, disa- bling the manual configuration for the related a- and b-waves.
Page 545 Channel Config Softtool 6.12.4 Intermod. Tab Controls the intermodulation measurement including power calibration. The intermodu- lation measurement requires options R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4 and R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K14. The results can be selected using the "Intermod." tab of the "Meas" softtool, see Chap- ter 6.2.4, "Intermod.
Page 546 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Reset Freq Conv Intermod Disables the intermodulation measurement mode for the active channel and switches back to normal mode (no frequency conversion). The intermodulation settings are maintained, however, the intermodulation traces are eliminated, and the default trace ) is displayed.
Page 547 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool ● "Add CW Mode" Activates a new channel for the spectrum measurement. The "CW Frequency" plus half the "Tone Distance" defines the center of the diagram. ● "Max IM Order" Defines the width of the spectrum measurement.
Page 548 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 2. Define the (frequency or power) sweep ranges for the lower tone. Refer to Chap- ter 6.12.4.4, "Frequencies and Power Dialog", on page 554. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 549 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 3. Select the measurement results. Refer to Chapter 6.2.4, "Intermod. Tab", on page 271. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 550 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool 4. Finish the wizard with or without power calibration. Refer to Chapter 6.12.4.5, "Intermod. Pwr. Cal Wizard", on page 555. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 551 The "OK" button is available when a valid configuration has been defined. Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Intermod" > "Define Intermod..." Independent sources for the lower and upper tone requires a R&S ZNB/ZNBT with two internal sources (see Chapter 5.7.13, "Internal Second Source",...
Page 552 Selects an analyzer port or external generator as a source of the upper tone signal. The source must be different from the lower tone source, i.e. you cannot combine cou- pled generator ports for the lower and upper tones. On a four-port R&S ZNB with Inter- nal Second Source, for example, you cannot combine ports 1 and 2 or ports 3 and 4.
Page 553 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Selecting a different source is necessary, if the bandwidth of the "Combiner Out" signal does not fully cover the required receiver frequency range. For example, if a filter is used at the combiner output to cut off the intermodulation products originating from the combiner.
Page 554 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect 6.12.4.4 Frequencies and Power Dialog The "Frequencies and Power" dialog defines the (frequency or power) sweep ranges for the lower tone. The frequency of the upper tone is equal to the lower tone fre- quency plus the "Tone Distance"...
Page 555 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Fit Frequency Range If one of the ranges exceeds the analyzer limits, the "Fit Frequency Range" button restricts the lower tone sweep range so that the analyzer can measure all selected IM products.
Page 556 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool If a frequency conversion measurement is active, a second source power calibra- tion is performed at the converted lower tone frequency (receiver frequency). This second source power calibration is the basis for the receiver calibration in step 3.
Page 557 Controls the measurement of the mixing products generated by a mixer under test (MUT) that is supplied with two independent RF signals. The scalar mixer mode is included in option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. An extension to a two-stage mixer system is possible.
Page 558 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.7.4.2, "Scalar Mixer Measurements", on page 217 ● "Two-Stage Mixer Measurements" on page 218 6.12.6.1 Controls on the Mixer Mode Tab Most of the "Mixer Mode" buttons are only enabled if the mixer measurement is set up properly.
Page 559 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Mixer Mode" > "Mixer Meas Wizard..." The setup of the mixer measurement proceeds in 4 steps: 1. Define the mixer. Chapter 6.12.6.3, "(Mixer) Setup Dialog", on page 561.
Page 560 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Measurement Parameter Channel Name Trace Name LO[m] Feedthrough Ch_LO LO_Thru S<j><k> = RF test port number, <j> = IF test port number,<k> = LO test port number [m] = Mixer number (only if 2 mixers are measured)
Page 561 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Depending on your selection, the wizard either closes without calibration or launches one of the mixer measurement-specific SMARTerCal wizards (see Chap- ter 6.12.6.4, "SMARTerCal (Cal Unit) Wizard for Mixer Mode", on page 565 and Chapter 6.12.6.5, "SMARTerCal (Manual) Wizard for Mixer...
Page 562 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Port selection The port selection lists in the upper part of the dialog contain all analyzer ports or external generators which can provide the RF signal and local oscillator (LO) signals. The fractional numbers in the rectangles indicate the frequency conversion settings from the "Frequency"...
Page 563 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Power tab The "Power" tab defines the power of the RF and the LO signals. The table in the "Power" tab contains the following columns: ● "Port" contains the RF and IF ports and one or two LO ports, depending on whether the "2nd Mixer"...
Page 564 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:RFMultiplier [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:LOMultiplier<Stg> 2nd Mixer Selects the measurement for a test setup including two mixers (instead of a single one); see Two-Stage Mixer Measurements. The signal diagram and the other control elements in the dialog are adjusted accordingly.
Page 565 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion 6.12.6.4 SMARTerCal (Cal Unit) Wizard for Mixer Mode Allows to perfom a variant of an automatic "SMARTerCal" that is specially tailored to the "Mixer Mode". Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Mixer Mode" > "SMARTerCal" –...
Page 566 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool If the R&S ZNB/ZNBT is used as LO and only a 2-port Cal Unit is available, Multi- ple Port Assignments are required. 2. Perform a SMARTerCal: Figure 6-42: System Error Correction User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 567 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-43: Scalar Power Calibration 6.12.6.5 SMARTerCal (Manual) Wizard for Mixer Mode Allows to perfom a variant of a manual "SMARTerCal" that is specially tailored to the "Mixer Mode". Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Mixer Mode" > "SMARTerCal" –...
Page 568 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool 2. Perform a SMARTerCal: Figure 6-44: System Error Correction Figure 6-45: Scalar Power Calibration 6.13 Offset Embed Softtool The "Offset Embed" softtool allows you to define a length offset and loss for each test port.
Page 569 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool DUT. It also contains advanced functions for deembedding/embedding the DUT from/ into more general physical/virtual (matching) networks placed between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT. Access: CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] Background information Refer to Chapter 5.6, "Offset Parameters and...
Page 570 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Access: Overview Panel > "Offset" Figure 6-47: Offset Embed dock widget: Offset panel The "Offset" panel can also be activated by selecting the Offset Tab One Way Loss Tab. Refer to its description for additional functions and remote commands.
Page 571 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:SECond [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<PhyPt>:SECond:FREQuency Reset Offsets The "Reset Offsets" button resets the length and loss parameters for all ports to their default values. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>[:STATe] All Offsets On / All Offsets Off Activates/deactivates the length and loss compensation for all ports.
Page 572 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool The "Single Ended" panel can also be activated by selecting the Single Ended Tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and addi- tional remote commands. Active The checkbox in the "Active" column activates or deactivates the selected "Single Ended"...
Page 573 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Move Up / Move Down Allows you to modify the sequence in which the active port set deembeddings/embed- dings are applied. Add / Delete Allows you to define the "Port Sets" to whom a deembedding or embedding network can be assigned.
Page 574 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool File Name /Inc. Seq. The "File Name 1" (and "File Name 2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embedding Port Sets Tab is defined using one or two Touchstone file(s).
Page 575 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Balanced Tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote commands. Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured de-/ embeding for the related balanced port (i.e.
Page 576 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool For the "1-Port Data" network type, the required touchstone file can also be selected from here ("..."). This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop Tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote com- mands.
Page 577 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Active The "Active" flags are inversely related to the Use Default flags of the logical port con- figuration (see Balanced Ports Dialog). "Active" "Use Default" ☑ ☐ ☐ ☑ 6.13.1.8 Differential Match Panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate differential match embedding.
Page 578 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential: EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] File Name 1 The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled if a 2-port data Network selected. When loading the touchstone file (*.s2p), the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
Page 579 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool 6.13.2.1 Controls on the Offset Tab Overview This button is available on all "Offset Embed" softtool tabs. It opens the Overview Panel in the Offset Embed Dock Widget. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent offset parameters for all ports.
Page 580 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>[:TIME] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:ELENgth [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:DISTance Permittivity / Velocity Factor Defines the permittivity (ε ) and velocity factor of the dielectric in the transmission line between the reference plane and the DUT. The velocity factor is 1/sqrt(ε...
Page 581 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool If "Adjust Time Gate" is on, the time gate is moved to left (right) when the offset-correc- ted reference plane is moved to the right (left). Its absolute position remains fixed. With this setting, it is possible, e.g., to keep the time gate at the position of the antenna con-...
Page 582 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Evaluation Range... The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the Evaluation Range Dialog that allows you to restrict the frequency range of auto length (and loss) calculations. 6.13.2.2 Fixture Compensation Dialog This dialog allows you to correct the measurement result for the effects of a test fixture.
Page 583 186. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:DFComp[:STATe]? Prompt for Each Port Determines how the R&S ZNB/ZNBT performs the sweeps for a given termination type (Open and/or Short; see "Measurement Type" on page 583). ● If unchecked, it performs the sweeps for Open/Short without interruption, implicitly assuming that all ports are terminated accordingly ●...
Page 584 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool For "Direct Compensation", it is also possible to save the acquired data to file. In future measurements, you can load these files instead of repeating the data acquisition. Figure 6-50: Measure Fixture dialog: Direct Compensation (and Prompt for Each Port) "Direct Compensation"...
Page 585 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool 6.13.3 One Way Loss Tab Defines loss parameters for each physical port. Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate length/loss compensation for selected ports (see Chapter 6.13.1.2, "Offset Panel", on page 569).
Page 586 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool ● If "Auto Length and Loss" is used with a line connected to a test port, the end of the line should be left open. ● To calculate the electrical length offset and loss of port i, you have to select a trace that uses port i as one of its receive ports.
Page 587 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-51: Offset Embed > Single Ended softtool left = 2 port data file selected for deembedding right = lumped element model selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
Page 588 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool ● The "2-Port Data" network is defined by means of an s2p file (see Select File...). For deembedding, the s2p file can also be generated by a third-party fixture model- ing tool (see "Fixture Tool"...
Page 589 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Fixture Tool The "Fixture Tool" section is only available for deembedding 2-port data networks. Its controls allow you to select and run a third-party fixture modeling tool (see Chap- ter 6.13.5, "Fixture Modeling Dialog",...
Page 590 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-53: Fixture Modeling Dialog: ISD - Balanced Ports Figure 6-54: Fixture Modeling Dialog: EZD - Single Ended Ports The fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps: 1. Measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture; see Chapter 6.13.5.2,...
Page 591 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool All files generated by actions in this dialog are stored in the directory C:\Users\Public \Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Embedding. The current implementation assumes symmetrical lead-ins and lead-outs. 6.13.5.1 Common Controls on the Dialog The following controls are located at the bottom of each dialog (ISD/SFD/EZD, single- ended/balanced): Advanced Settings ...
Page 592 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> Cancel Closes the dialog without applying any deembedding files. 6.13.5.2 Measure Coupon The "Measure Coupon" section allows you to measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture.
Page 593 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure on page 845 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset Allows you to load the coupon properties from a Touchstone file (*.s*p”).
Page 594 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Measure Starts the measurement of DUT + Test Fixture at the Active ports. The display will change to show all the S parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna \Embedding.
Page 595 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool left = single-ended right = balanced Run <Fixture Modeling Tool> Runs the selected fixure deembedding tool. This button is only active, if both ● the test coupon measurement finished successfully or the test coupon data were successfully loaded from file (see Chapter 6.13.5.2, "Measure...
Page 596 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Display Select "Display" to display some or all the S parameter traces of the generated touch- stone file that are applied for deembedding. A dialog then allows you to select the S parameter traces to be imported to new memory traces: 6.13.5.5...
Page 597 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Test Coupons > Insertion Loss Tells the ISD tool about the linearity of the 2xThru test coupon: ● "Linear": linear insertion loss ● "Non-Linear" (default): non-linear insertion loss ● "Resonant": the 2x thru test coupon will be split and used directly for deembedding This option may be more accurate when the fixture and 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location.
Page 598 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe Automatic Flt Tm for DUT + Lead Ins ← Lead Ins If checked (default) the flight time for DUT + lead-ins is calculated automatically. Other- wise it can be specified (see "Flt Tm for DUT + Lead Ins"...
Page 599 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt Ports to Skip (manual) ← DUT With Fixture Ports to Skip is set to "Manually set ports" this allows you to define the ports to be skipped. Enter the port numbers, separated by blanks (e.g. '1 3 4').
Page 600 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool DC Extrapolation ← Calculations This setting is only active, if a recent version of the ISD tool (from 2019-12 or later) is used. If unchecked (default), the touchstone data of the generated deembedding file reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep.
Page 601 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Adjust Impedance Mismatch If checked, the SFD tool performs automatic impedance adjustments. Remote command: on page 832 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:AUTO 6.13.5.8 EZD Advanced Settings Allows you to specify advanced parameters for the EZD tool.
Page 602 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 512), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview"...
Page 603 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool symbol selects "no network" and disables de-/embedding for the selected port set. The "D1" and "D2" networks are defined by imported S-parameter data; see For 4-port networks that are (partly) defined by lumped elements, the lumped element parameters are displayed below the graphical network list.
Page 604 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Persisted recall sets contain the full de-/embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>...
Page 605 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-58: Offset Embed > Balanced softtool left = 4 port data file selected for de-/embedding right = other network selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
Page 606 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool symbol selects "no network" and disables deembedding/embedding for the selected balanced port. The 4-port data network (symbol "D1" only) is defined by means of an s4p file (see D2). For deembedding, the s4p file can also be generated by a third-party fixture mod- eling tool (see "Fixture Tool"...
Page 607 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Persisted recall sets contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>...
Page 608 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 512), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview"...
Page 609 Otherwise the same de-/embedding network is used for all active ports. The checkbox is only visible if the instrument supports multiple DUTs, which is the case for R&S ZNBT and 4-port R&S ZNB with 2 internal sources. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:GROup 6.13.9 Differential Match Tab...
Page 610 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Use the complementary dock widget to access the balanced port configuration and to activate or deactivate "Differential Match" embedding for selected balanced ports (see Chapter 6.13.1.8, "Differential Match Panel", on page 577).
Page 611 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Network The graphical list contains the available 2-port networks for Differential Match embed- ding: ● symbol selects "no network" and disables differential match embedding for the selected balanced port. ● The "2-Port Data" network is defined by means of imported S-parameter data; see Select File...
Page 612 6.13.11 Delta-L Tab The controls on the "Delta-L" tab allow you to set up and perform a Delta-L PCB char- acterization. The "Delta-L" tab is only visible if option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 is installed on the instrument. See Chapter 5.7.11, "Delta-L 4.0 PCB Characterization",...
Page 613 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool 6.13.11.1 Delta-L Settings Dialog From the "Detal-L Settings" dialog, you can set up the Delta-L measurement channel and how the external tool is run. Access: CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] > "Delta-L" > "Delta-L Settings..."...
Page 614 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:PORDer Frequencies Delta-L computes the uncertainty in the loss-per-inch calculation at specified frequen- cies. The "Frequencies" table is pre-populated with the frequencies recommended by Intel. If you want to enter your own values, uncheck "Use Default Frequencies" and select "Edit User Frequencies..."...
Page 615 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool The default "Minimum" is the standard Delta-L start frequency of 10 MHz. The default "Maximum" is either 20 GHz or the instrument's maximum frequency, whichever is smaller. Buttons are available to set "Maximum" to the standard Delta-L stop frequen- cies of 20 GHz and 40 GHz (if within the instrument's frequency range), and to the instrument's maximum frequency.
Page 616 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement The settings in the "1L Measurement"/"2L Measurement"/"3L Measurement" sections configure and control the measurement of the 1st/2nd/3rd line. The "1L Measurement" is always enabled. Depending on the selected "Method"...
Page 617 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Length ← 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement Specifies the length of the related line. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L:LENGth Runs the AITT-DL tool with the collected measurement data and the configured Delta-L settings.
Page 618 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-59: Method 2L results Markers are added to the smoothed traces at the analysis frequencies. The marker name indicates to which analysis pair it belongs and the computed Delta-L uncertainty. Method 1L For "Method 1L", the Delta-L diagram displays the following traces:...
Page 619 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool Markers "DeltaL1..." are added to the"StdDev" trace at the analysis frequencies. The marker names indicate the computed Delta-L uncertainties. 6.14 File Softtool The "File" softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data.
Page 620 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool 6.14.1 Recall Sets Tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. It can be stored to a VNA recall set file (*.znx|*.znxml).
Page 621 File Softtool The R&S ZNB/ZNBT supports two recall set file formats ● znx (default) Binary file format, supported by all firmware versions of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT ● znxml XML based file format, introduced with the R&S ZNA; supported with firmware ver- sions 3.00 an higher...
Page 622 Note: In case the recall set could only be loaded after adjusting some incompatible settings, the info message "The setup data changed while loading" is displayed. This may happen, for example, if you attempt to load a recall set of a different R&S ZNB/ZNBT model or with different optioning. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:STATe Save Saves the active recall set to a file (*.znx|*.znxml) .
Page 623 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool In the dialog proceed as follows: 1. Reassign Matrices: For each "Matrix in Recall Set", select a switch matrix of the same (driver) type as "Assigned Matrix". If no switch matrix of the same type exists, select "Switch Matrix" to open the...
Page 624 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool 6.14.2 Favorites Tab The "Favorites" tab allows you to manage a list of favorite recall sets. A favorite is actually a path to the related recall set, i.e. ● if the recall set is modified, then the modified recall set is loaded the next time the favorite is selected ●...
Page 625 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool 6.14.3 Print Tab The buttons on the "Print" tab allow you to send the diagrams of the active setup to an external printer, to a file or to the clipboard. Content and layout can be defined in the Printer Setup Dialog.
Page 626 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT File Softtool The HCOPy... commands provide the printer settings; see Chapter 8.3.7, "HCOPy Commands", on page 1051. 6.14.4.1 Content Tab The "Content" tab allows you to select the contents to be printed. The selected item in the "Print Charts" group specifies how the active recall set is prin- ted.
Page 627 The "Page Setup" settings are visualized in the preview page in the lower part of the dialog. Tip: The printer settings are not affected by a preset of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. Use the "Remote" tab in the System Config Dialog to restore default settings.
Page 628 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Load Simulation Data... Imports previously stored trace data into the active diagram. The analyzer opens a dia- log box to select the file from all trace files (*.s?p, *.csv, *.dat) stored on the file system;...
Page 629 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, obtain an overview of all imple- mented remote control programs, test programs, compile and run test scripts. For a detailed description, refer to Chapter 7.1.3, "GPIB...
Page 630 6.15.2 TDR Application (R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20) The "TDR" (Time Domain Reflectometry) application is provided by the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20. It is only visible if this option is installed. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" Background information Chapter 5.7.2.7, "Extended Time Domain...
Page 631 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The "TDR Setup" contains the following sections/controls: ● "TDR Wizard..." Opens the "TDR Wizard" (see Chapter 6.15.2.2, "TDR Wizard", on page 631) ● "Topology" Opens the "Balanced Ports" dialog that allows to configure the logical DUT ports (see Chapter 6.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports...
Page 632 GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Currently, the "TDR Wizard" is only available for the R&S ZNB. Step 1: Port Topology The "Port Topology" step allows you to select between predefined (balanced) port con- figurations. The port configurations are the same as the ones offered on the "Predefined Config"...
Page 633 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Once you have selected a measurement, you can finish the wizard and proceed to the Fixture Compensation Dialog using the "Finish with Fixture Compensation" button. 6.15.2.3 TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog This dialog allows you to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation and subsequent TDR simulation.
Page 634 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Controls in the TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog Figure 6-60: TDR Stimulus Settings dialog The "TDR Stimulus Settings" dialog offers basic settings. Instead of specifying the sweep parameters directly, they are derived from time domain properties of the DUT.
Page 635 TDR Stimulus - Advanced Settings Dialog The "TDR Stimulus - Advanced Settings " compiles advanced settings of the time domain transformation that is available with the standard time domain option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K2. Access: TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog > "Advanced Settings..."...
Page 636 ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Source/Receiver Settings The "RF Power" is the output power of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, "IF Bandwidth" and "Aver- age Factor" determine the operation of the related R&S ZNB/ZNBT receiver. For a description and related remote control commands see Chapter 6.9, "Power Bw Avg...
Page 637 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The available results depend on the selected Modulation: ● For NRZ modulated generator signals the result display comprises two separate info fields for "Basic" and "Time" results (see "Measurements..." on page 637). By default they are stacked below each other, however, they can be moved independ- ently like any other info field.
Page 638 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool For PAM signals these results are not available. For a description of the result values see "Eye Diagram Results" on page 210. Furthermore it is possible to change the Rise (and Fall) Time definition for the eye measurement from the standard 10–90% (90–10%) step to any other "Start...
Page 639 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool For advanced configuration of the eye diagram simulation see Chapter 6.15.2.6, "Advanced Settings Dialog", on page 642 Measurement / Topology "Measurement" allows you to select an S-Parameter, i.e. the transmission (or reflec- tion) whose time domain properties shall be analyzed. The "Topology" to the right is updated accordingly.
Page 640 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Load Bit Stream A user-defined bit stream can be loaded from file and is repeated until the configured Length is reached. If no pattern is loaded from file, the default pattern "10" is repeated instead.
Page 641 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:OLEVel CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:ZLEVel Low Pass Defines the signal shape of the simulated digital signal: toggles between ideal rectan- gular shape ("Low Pass" = disabled, default) and a more realistic shape ("Low Pass" = enabled).
Page 642 The "Advanced Settings" dialog gives full access to the calculation chain of the eye diagram simulation. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" > "Eye Diag" > "Advanced Settings..." This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Controls in the Dialog ● Generator, Emphasis,...
Page 643 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Simulated Bit Pattern / Simulated Rise Time Chapter 6.15.2.5, "Eye Diagram Dialog", on page 638 Modulation "Modulation" on page 640 High Level / Low Level "High Level / Low Level"...
Page 644 Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. In transmission systems known losses of the channel are typically compensated already in the transmitter. The most common setting is to boost high frequencies com- pared to low frequencies since the channels show typically larger losses for high fre- quencies.
Page 645 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The FIR filter coefficients are found by solving the equations: – c – c = Va – c = Vb = Vc = Vd subject to the normalization condition | c | + | c...
Page 646 Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Four types of jitter can be configured and selectively enabled: random, periodic, Dirac and user defined. If enabled, the jitter is added at the start of each symbol period, and its magnitude depends on the parameters specified in the dialog.
Page 647 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Dirac This type of jitter is specified by the amplitude in seconds ("Dirac Delta", positive or negative), as well as the probability of the jitter occurring at each symbol period ("Dirac Probability"). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:DIRac...
Page 648 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Active Enables/disables noise insertion. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe Defines the root mean square noise level. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:RMS The "Define DUT" dialog allows you to switch between different transmission (and reflection) paths of the DUT and to configure its DC properties.
Page 649 Advanced Settings Dialog This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 only. Similar to the usage of emphasis the equalization targets to improve the signal quality at the receiver end of the transmission system. The building block "Equalize" simulates a continuous-time linear equalizer (CTLE) which is typically realized as an analog cir- cuit in receivers.
Page 650 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool CTLE Equalizer Specifies the parameters of the equalizer – a two-pole filter with single zero. With "DC Gain" ω ω s + ω angular frequencies ω = 2πf, the transfer function is given by:...
Page 651 This checkbox determines whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT should make an audible beep on mask failures. Note: In contrast to the R&S ZNB, the R&S ZNBT does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the R&S ZNBT or operate it via remote desktop.
Page 652 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool There are three mask areas that can be set up for the eye diagram test: center poly- gon, top rectangle, and bottom rectangle. Testing against these mask areas can be selectively enabled. Polygon Setup Allows you to define the center polygon and to activate it in the mask test.
Page 653 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Figure 6-65: Center polygon setup: hexagon Figure 6-66: Center polygon setup: rectangle The polygon is centered at the Mask Center. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical Top/Bottom Setup Defines and activates the top and bottom rectangles.
Page 654 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Test Settings Allows you to set the absolute or relative number of mask violations that will result in a mask fail condition. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:CONDition CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:TOLerance CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE Save / Load Mask Configuration Opens a dialog that allows to save/load the mask test configuration to/from a 7bit ASCII file (*.mask).
Page 655 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool 6.15.2.9 Rise Time Tab The "Rise Time" tab allows you to enable and configure the Rise Time Measurement. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" > "Rise Time" Access: [APPLIC] key or "Application > Rise Time" menu Rise Time Enables/disables the rise time measurement.
Page 656 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool 6.15.2.10 Skew Tab The "Skew" tab allows you to enable and configure the Skew Measurement. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" > "Skew" Skew Enables/disables the skew measurement between the active trace and the...
Page 657 This checkbox determines whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT should make an audible beep on skew limit violations. Note: In contrast to the R&S ZNB, the R&S ZNBT does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the R&S ZNBT or operate it via remote desktop.
Page 658 295. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "TDR" > "Y Axis" This tab is only visible if the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT- K20 is available. 6.15.2.13 X Axis Tab The "X Axis" tab allows you to define the x axis scaling of the active diagram. The scal- ing logic is the same as for all other diagram types, see Chapter 6.4, "Scale...
Page 659 Applic Softtool ● This tab is only visible if the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ ZNBT-K20 is available. ● If the active trace is represented as an eye diagram, the "X Axis Settings" are grayed out, as shown above.
Page 660 The "DUT Centric Wizard" lets you proceed with the followng steps: 1. Select the "DUT Type". Currently, this can be either "Mixer" or "Amplifier", where "Mixer" measurements require option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4 (see Chapter 5.7.4, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 215). Other DUT types may be added in future releases of the analyzer firmware.
Page 661 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Guided Mixer Setup Define DUT The "Define DUT" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to set up the basic properties of a mixer. Similar to the Mixer Configuration Dialog of the Manager.
Page 662 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool DUT/VNA Connections The "DUT/VNA Connections" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard" allows you to configure the RF connections between VNA and DUT. Figure 6-69: Mixer/VNA connections User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 663 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Figure 6-70: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of ports (on the ana- lyzer and connected switch matrices) and the number of independent sources (on the and connected external generators).
Page 664 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 663 either one, two, or three channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The "Summary" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard"...
Page 665 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Calibrate Newly Created Channels If you select "Calibrate Newly Created Channels", then on closing the "DUT Centric Wizard", the FW will create the channels and proceed with suitable calibrations. Guided Amplifier Setup Define DUT The "Define DUT"...
Page 666 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Load from DUT Manager Use "Load from DUT Manager" to load a previously configured mixer from the DUT manager. This will open a dialog that allows you to select the DUT to be loaded: Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager"...
Page 667 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Figure 6-71: Mixer/VNA connections Figure 6-72: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of ports (on the ana- lyzer and connected switch matrices) and the number of independent sources...
Page 668 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard" based on the properties of the DUT, the RF topology and the selected measurements.
Page 669 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 663 either one, two, or three channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The "Summary" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard"...
Page 670 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Step 1: Channel Selection Chapter 6.11.1.2, "Channel Selection for Calibration Dialog", on page 415. The channel selection is shown, even if the active recall set contains only one channel. Step 2: Calibration Settings Defines power settings that apply to all subsequent calibrations and allows you to select some optional calibration steps.
Page 671 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Data of completed calibrations are saved, data of incomplete calibrations are discar- ded. 6.15.3.2 DUT Manager Dialog The DUT manager allows you to create, configure, and manage DUTs. Access: ● SYSTEM – [APPLIC] > "Application: DUT Centric" > "DUT Manager..."...
Page 672 GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool The DUT type "Mixer" is only availble if the instrument is equipped with software optionR&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. See Chapter 5.7.4, "Frequency Conversion Measure- ments", on page 215. Allows you to create a user-defined DUT. Filter by DUT Type is set to a particular DUT type, a DUT of this type is created immediately.
Page 673 Access: DUT Manager Dialog > "Edit..." with a DUT of type "Mixer" selected The DUT type "Mixer" is only availble if the instrument is equipped with software optionR&S ZNB/ZNBT-K4. See Chapter 5.7.4, "Frequency Conversion Measure- ments", on page 215. Most of the mixer properties are straight-forward...
Page 674 ) shows the distance from the calibrated reference plane; faults appear as peaks above a certain level. If option K3 is not installed on the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, the "Distance to Fault" application is hidden. To achieve the best distance resolution, set the sweep span as large as possible and...
Page 675 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool A standard DtF measurement is prepared in the order from top to bottom: 1. Enable DtF measurement, see "Distance to Fault" on page 675 2. Configure the distance window, see "Start Distance / Stop Distance"...
Page 676 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool ● enables additional controls on the "Distance to Fault" tab ● appends the selected cable type to the trace label (see "Cable Type..." on page 677) ● displays an additional "Distance Domain" trace info line below the channel line Note that all info lines (channel info, trace info,"Distance Domain"...
Page 677 If the required number of sweep points would be higher than 100001 (the maximum number of sweep points of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT), the analyzer sets N to 100001 and displays the following message box: "OK" reduces the frequency span Δf to Δf = v ·...
Page 678 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Select "Available Cable Types..." to access the list of predefined and user-defined cable types (see Chapter 6.15.4.2, "Available Cable Types... Dialog", on page 679). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect Start Cal Unit... (P2) Refl OSM / Start Cal... (P2) Refl OSM Sets up and runs the "Calibration Unit"/"Calibration Setting"...
Page 679 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Fault Limit Determines the level above which peaks in the active "Distance to Fault" trace are con- sidered as faults. The fault limit is defined relative to the 0 dB-line in the test diagram, i.e. the peak response value for total reflection after proper calibration.
Page 680 ● Frequency list If the cable attenuation is specified at several frequency points, the R&S ZNB/ ZNBT calculates the Attenuation (f ) by linear interpolation. If f is below center...
Page 681 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Applic Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe 6.15.4.3 Fault List Dock Widget The "Fault List" dock widget allows you to explore and save all peaks that violate the active Fault Limit. Access: [Trace] > "Distance to Fault" > "Fault List..."...
Page 682 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Export to File... ← Contents Opens a dialog that allows to export the (filtered) content of the fault list to an ASCII file with configurable "Field Separator" and "Decimal Separator". This CSV type file contains one line (terminated by CR+LF) per fault. With ";" as "Field Separator"...
Page 683 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Related settings Use the icons in the toolbar to add diagrams and traces. Use the "Zoom Active Trc" icon to zoom into a rectangular portion inside a diagram. See also Chapter 4.3.4, "Han- dling Diagrams, Traces, and Markers",...
Page 684 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] Delete Diagram Deletes the current diagram area including all traces displayed in the diagram area. The remaining diagrams are renumbered; each recall set always contains diagrams with contiguous numbers. "Delete Diag Area" is disabled if the recall set contains only one diagram area: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.
Page 685 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Overlay All Places all traces in a single diagram area which is maximized to occupy the whole screen. This function is available irrespective of the trace format and the channel set- tings; it is even possible to overlay Cartesian and complex diagrams.
Page 686 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool 6.16.2 Split Tab Arranges multiple diagrams on the screen. Some of the "Split" settings are also available in the Diagram Tab. Refer to the follow- ing sections: ● "Overlay All" on page 685 ●...
Page 687 "Diagram" tab. Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Split Type The R&S ZNB/ZNBT provides the following split types: ● "Lineup": The diagrams are arranged side by side; each diagram occupies the entire screen height.
Page 688 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool 6.16.3 Config Tab Displays or hides controls and information elements of the screen and controls the appearance of the individual diagrams. Hiding the controls and information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
Page 689 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool ● "Black and White Solid" sets a white background color. All traces and information elements in the diagram areas are black. All traces are drawn with solid lines. "User Define..." opens a dialog to modify the predefined schemes, changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements.
Page 690 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool The info table is a possible container for info fields and can be placed to the bottom, to the left, or to the right of the screen. See also Chapter 6.7.8, "Info Field Tab",...
Page 691 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Element Selects the screen element to be modified. The list contains the background and all traces (more precisely trace properties), text elements and lines in the diagrams. The maximum number of trace properties can be configured in the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config"...
Page 692 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement point in the segment. Consequently, the colorized trace segment can begin before the begin of the failed range and can end before its end.
Page 693 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool General > Black White Scheme / Line Styles Scheme / Light Scheme Modifies the user color scheme, in particular the trace and channel lines, in a prede- fined way. As an alternative, select predefined color schemes; see "Color Scheme"...
Page 694 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool Access: Info Window > "Configuration..." Use the "Info Field" combo box to select a marker or bandfilter search info field whose contents you want to display in parts or in total. It contains all info fields of the current recall set that are currently not displayed in the info table (see "Info Table: Show / Posi-...
Page 695 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Display Softtool 6.16.4 View Bar Tab Displays or hides information panels and bars of the graphical user interface. Hiding the information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
Page 696 Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:STOols[:STATe] 6.16.5 Touchscreen Tab Allows you to lock the touchscreen functionality of a R&S ZNB to prevent inadvertent entries. This tab is not available on a R&S ZNBT. Enabled / Lock Diagrams / Lock Screen ●...
Page 697 For the R&S ZNB, make sure to select the correct setup file (32 bit or 64 bit). To check for the firmware application type, open the "About Vna" dialog (select "Help" > "About..." from the menu bar) and watch out for the "Application Type"...
Page 698: Table Of Contents
User Interface Tab....................702 ● Messages Tab....................... 704 ● Channel Bits Tab....................705 ● Advanced Tab....................... 706 ● Power Tab......................707 ● Recovery Tab......................709 Presets Tab Specifies the behavior of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT upon a preset. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 699 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Preset Scope Defines whether a preset affects all open recall sets ("Instrument") or the active recall set only. The "Preset Scope" applies to the GUI and to the com- SYSTem:PRESet[:DUMMy] mand. The *RST command always resets all open recall sets.
Page 700: Calibration Tab
Remote command: SYSTem:PRESet:USER:NAME SYSTem:PRESet:USER[:STATe] Start in Preset If this option is active, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT FW always starts with the configured Preset Configuration. Otherwise it starts with the previous state, i.e. the settings that were per- sisted during the previous shutdown.
Page 701 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Auto Averaging Activates automatic averaging, which means that the VNA performs multiple calibration sweeps and applies averaging to reduce trace noise. In contrast to regular averaging (see Chapter 6.9.3, "Average Tab", on page 389), the number of calibration sweeps is calculated automatically.
Page 702: User Interface Tab
If enabled, those beeps are generated even if "Sounds" is unchecked. Note: In contrast to the R&S ZNB, the R&S ZNBT does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the R&S ZNBT or operate it via remote desktop.
Page 703 Note: If your instrument is equipped with option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K19, 1 mHz Fre- quency Resolution, set "Decimal Places" of unit "Hz" to 12 to utilize the high frequency resolution.
Page 704: Messages Tab
Setup Softtool Units Prefix Sets the unit prefix for frequencies (Base unit: Hz) to kilo (k), mega (M), giga (G) or tera (T) or lets the R&S ZNB/ZNBT select the appropriate prefix ("Auto" = default set- ting). Remote command: Reset Colors / Reset Dialogs / Reset Decimal Places / Reset Units Prefix Resets the color settings ("System"...
Page 705: Channel Bits Tab
® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Show Remote Error Info Messages Defines whether information popups are displayed whenever a remote control com- mand error occurs. The displayed information can be useful for program development and optimization; it does not necessarily indicate that a remote control script is faulty or non-executable.
Page 706: Advanced Tab
® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Pin 16 - 19 Selects the control mechanism for the signals at pins 16 to 19 of the USER PORT con- nector. ● "Channel Bits": Signals are controlled by channel bits 4 to 7. No drive port indica- tion at the USER PORT connector.
Page 707: Power Tab
® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: DIAGnostic:DUMP:SIZE Touchstone Export Options Configures whitespace insertion during Touchstone file export. The default export format is explained in Chapter 5.4.2.1, "Touchstone Files", on page 141: ● logical columns are vertically aligned using spaces ●...
Page 708 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Power Reduction at Sweep End The power reduction settings apply to all sweep modes but are particularly useful in single sweep mode. Power Keep Settling Delay Auto Reduce End Measurement Restart Sweep Time...
Page 709: Recovery Tab
Factory default is 180 µs. Remote command: SOURce:POWer:GENerator:SDELay Global AGC (R&S ZNB only!) Allows you to select between two algorithms: "Memory AGC" Optimized gain control pre-measurement: only if required and for as (factory few sweep points as possible.
Page 710 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Chapter 11.2, "System Recovery", on page 1425. 6.17.1.3 Info Dialog The "Info" dialog displays information about the instrument and its operation. All func- tions are primarily intended for error diagnostic and service purposes; see Chap- ter 10.3, "Collecting Information for Technical...
Page 711 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Create R&S Support Information Saves the current selftest results to a zipped report file you can send to R&S Support for fault diagnosis; see Chapter 10.3, "Collecting Information for Technical Support", on page 1421.
Page 712 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Options Tab Shows the installed software and hardware options. You can also enable additional software options using the option key supplied with the option. Proceed according to the instructions in the dialog. For an overview of options, refer to Chapter 5.7, "Optional Extensions and Accesso-...
Page 713 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Configured External Switch Matrices The "Hardware" tab also provides information about connected switch matrices. In par- ticular, for mechanical matrices the current relay switch counts are reported (if suppor- ted by the matrix).
Page 714 "dotted decimal" (example: 0.1.18.0) representation. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction 6.17.2 Freq. Ref. Tab Selects a reference signal for synchronization between the R&S ZNB/ZNBT and exter- nal devices. A common reference frequency is advisable to ensure frequency accuracy and frequency stability in the test setup. State Indicates the state of the internal phase locked loop: If the frequencies are properly synchronized, the state is "locked".
Page 715 6.17.3.1 Controls on the Remote Settings Tab IP Address Displays the current IP4 address of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. By default, the analyzer is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration (DHCP) and obtain all IP address information automatically. See Chapter 4.1.12.1, "Assigning an IP Address",...
Page 716 ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:DCLear:SUPPress Remote Language Selects the syntax of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's instrument control commands. ● The DEFAULT language corresponds to the commands reported in this documen- tation; see Chapter 8.3, "SCPI Command Reference", on page 779.
Page 717 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory SYSTem:OPTions[:STRing] SYSTem:OPTions:FACTory FORMat:BORDer Advanced ... Opens a dialog that allows to set the following parameters: ● "Wait for Data after Sweep" determines the execution behavior of INITiate[:IMMediate] commands (see Chapter 8.3.8, "INITiate...
Page 718 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Instrument Messages... Opens the System Configuration dialog with the Messages Tab selected. From there you can configure the display of instrument messages as information popups, in partic- ular the display of remote control command errors.
Page 719 241. The configuration of a new external power meter involves the following steps: 1. Connect the power meter to your R&S ZNB/ZNBT using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface. 2. If the power meter is connected via LAN, enable LAN Detection 3.
Page 720 ► Select Add Device to define the interface type and address. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can auto-detect the instrument type (driver) and the serial number of the connected power meter. To control external devices via GPIB, the pre-installed RS Visa library (visa32.dll) must be replaced by the NI Visa library.
Page 721 Note: "LAN detection" only works for external devices on the IP subnet with the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. As a prerequisite, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT must accept incoming connections on UDP port 2473. If necessary, add a corresponding inbound rule to your firewall settings.
Page 722 IP addresses must agree with the entries in the VISA library. The remaining interface types require composite address formats; see Table 6-6. If an instrument is connected to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address. ●...
Page 723 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool requires the respective device to be online, i.e. connected, switched on and ready to be used. Access: SYSTEM – [SETUP] > "External Devices" > "Power Meter Config..." Deembed Two-Port (All Channels) Reads and modifies the state of the built-in S-parameter correction that is available on certain R&S®NRP-Z power sensors.
Page 724 Setup Softtool The configuration of a new external generator involves the following steps: 1. Connect the generator to your R&S ZNB/ZNBT using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface. 2. If the generator is connected via LAN, enable "LAN detection"...
Page 725 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: n.a. Configured Devices Table with all generators in use with their properties. The properties of manually config- ured generators ("Add Device", opens the "Add External Generator" dialog) may be changed in the dialog.
Page 726 IP addresses must agree with the entries in the VISA library. The remaining interface types require composite address formats; see Table 6-7. If an instrument is connected to the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address. ●...
Page 727 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool an appropriate driver file. Generator driver files (*.gen) are stored in the Resources\ExtDev subdirectory of the analyzer's program directory. Table 6-7: Interface types for external generators and address formats Physical Interface Address Remarks...
Page 728 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool 6.17.5.1 Controls on the External Ports Tab The buttons in the "External Ports" panel open the following dialogs: ● "Define Ports...", see Chapter 6.17.5.2, "Define Physical Ports Dialog", on page 728 ● "Switch Matrix...", see Chapter 6.17.5.3, "External Matrices...
Page 729 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool a wave, b wave, Source Define a physical port by assigning its reference receiver, measurement receiver and generator, respectively. The receivers and generators can be freely assigned, but without reusing the same (original) physical port in different (redefined) ports.
Page 730 Setup Softtool The registration of a new external switch matrix typically involves the following steps: 1. connect the switch matrix to your R&S ZNB/ZNBT using LAN or USB interface. 2. If the switch matrix is connected via LAN, enable "LAN detection".
Page 731 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Known Devices Table with the discovered switch matrices. "Scan Instruments" refreshes the table; copies a discovered switch matrix to the table of "Configured Devices". Remote command: Configured Devices Table displaying the registered switch matrices.
Page 732 Note: "LAN detection" will only work for external devices sharing the same IP subnet with the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. As a prerequisite, the R&S ZNB/ZNBT must accept incoming connections on UDP port 2473. If necessary, add a corresponding inbound rule to your firewall settings.
Page 733 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:DEFine SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:SERial? Delete All Unregisters all switch matrices, automatically deleting all switch matrix RF connections. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix:DELete 6.17.5.4 Device LAN Configuration Dialog The "Device LAN Configuration" dialog allows to read and modify the "IP Configura- tion"...
Page 734 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool simply use "Copy from local network" to copy the "Subnet Mask" and "Standard Gate- way" from the analyzer's IP settings. 6.17.5.5 Switch Matrix RF Connections Dialog The "Switch Matrix RF Connections" dialog allows you to define the RF connections between the VNA and the switch matrices and the RF connections to the (DUT) test ports.
Page 735 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool The definition of the RF connections typically involves the following steps: 1. "Add" one or more switching matrices These matrices must have been registered before; see Chapter 6.17.5.3, "External Matrices Dialog", on page 729 for details.
Page 736 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool Select some matrices and tap "OK" to remove them from the RF connection configura- tion or tap "Cancel" to quit the dialog without removing a switch matrix from the RF connection configuration. Delete All Opens a confirmation dialog Either tap "OK"...
Page 737 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Setup Softtool In the "Edit" dialog select the appropriate VNA port or tap "Set Unused" to delete the VNA port association. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MVNA SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MLVNa Edit Test Port Connection To edit a test port connection, tap on the corresponding port symbol.
Page 738 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Help Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MTESt SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MLTest SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix:CONFigure:TVNA 6.18 Help Softtool The "Help" softtool presents the functions of the menu bar's "Help" menu, except call- ing context sensitive help. Access: "Help" – "Contents..." | "Index..." | "About..." from the menu bar.
Page 739 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Additional Function Keys Open the Info Dialog for full information about the instrument. 6.19 Additional Function Keys The SYSTEM hardkey panel also provides the Windows®, [HELP] and [PRESET] keys that do not open a softtool but perform an immediate action.
Page 740 ® GUI Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT Additional Function Keys In the Toolbar, the corresponding icons are disabled (grayed out) if an undo or redo is not possible. In general, the undo and redo actions are disabled if the size of the active recall set file exceeds 1 MB.
Page 741 32). A VISA installation on the remote con- trol PC is required. ● The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can also be remote-controlled via USB. The USB Device con- nector is on the rear panel of the instrument (see Chapter 4.2, "Instrument Tour",...
Page 742 IVI foundation. Compared to its predecessor VXI-11, it provides speed and other improvements. HiSLIP is encapsulated in VISA; the resource string reads TCPIP::<R&S ZNB/ZNBT IP address>::hislip0. The RS Visa library supports HiSLIP. If the connection fails, access the Windows con- trol panel of the controlled instrument and open port 4880 for incoming connections.
Page 743 In general, program development is further simplified by a graphical program environment. Rohde & Schwarz offers various R&S ZNB/ZNBT driver types (LabView, LabWind- ows/CVI, IVI, VXIplug&play...) for different programming languages. The drivers are available free of charge on the product pages in the R&S internet, along with instal-...
Page 744 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control ● GPIB address (for connection to controllers equipped with a National Instruments GPIB interface using the GPIB bus connector) ● RSIB, VISA (TCPIP) and VISA (HSLIP) (for LAN connection, requires an appropri- ate IP or local host address);...
Page 745 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control VXI-11 protocol, the alternative commands @REM and @LOC can be used to switch from manual to remote control and back. While remote control is active, operation via the front panel is disabled except the "Remote"...
Page 746 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement. Therefore, it is recommended to switch off the display in real measure- ment applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly.
Page 747 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Introduction to Remote Control control. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30 are permissible. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings. SCPI commands: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 7.1.4.2 Returning to Manual Operation Return to manual operation can be initiated via the front panel or via remote control.
Page 748 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages 7.2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB / VXI-11 protocol can be either interface messages or device messages. For a description of interface messages refer to the relevant sections: ●...
Page 749 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999.0. Not all the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments), however, their syntax follows SCPI rules. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of instru-...
Page 750 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax: ● Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i. e. on the position in the com- mand header they are inserted in.
Page 751 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ;". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal;:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands.
Page 752 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Example: TRIGger:SOURce? Response: IMM 7.2.3 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data.
Page 753 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Messages Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description, you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer. 7.2.3.2 Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0.
Page 754 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Remote Control Concepts 7.2.3.6 Overview of Syntax Elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line, the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
Page 755 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Remote Control Concepts The following frequently used commands create and delete traces, channels, and dia- gram areas: Create new trace and new channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<Trace Name>','< Meas Parameter> (if channel <Ch> does not exist yet) Delete trace CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace...
Page 756 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Remote Control Concepts ● The active traces for manual and remote control may be different. The following program example illustrates how to create, select and reference traces. It is instructive to observe the analyzer screen in order to check the effect of each step.
Page 757 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Basic Remote Control Concepts Example: *RST; :INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including the channels created later). INITiate1:IMMediate; *WAI Start a single sweep in channel no. 1, wait until the sweep is terminated before pro- ceeding to the next command (see Chapter 7.4, "Command...
Page 758 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command Processing Method Commands / Example Assign or query trace name of a trace numbered CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME 'ABCD' <Trc> CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? (returns 'ABCD') Query trace number assigned to a trace named CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME:ID? 'ABCD' 'ABCD' (returns the actual trace number; the trace suffix is...
Page 759 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command Processing nition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. If the input buffer is full, the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed.
Page 760 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command Processing Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (see Chapter 7.5.3.4, "STATus:OPERation", on page 768). The hard- ware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has set- tled.
Page 761 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Command Processing :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? always returns 1000000000 (1 GHz). When: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 is sent, however, the result is not specified by SCPI. The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received.
Page 762 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *WAI Stops further command processing until all commands Send *WAI directly after the command which sent before *WAI have been executed should be terminated before the next command is executed.
Page 763 STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR. 7.5.1 Overview of Status Registers The status registers of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT are implemented as shown below. not used not used not used -&-...
Page 764 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer. The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
Page 765 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
Page 766 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. 7.5.3.1 STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
Page 767 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning MSS bit (master status summary bit) This bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable reg- ister SRE.
Page 768 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC after all previous commands have been executed. Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instru- ment instead.
Page 769 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning INTegrity register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register and the associ- ated ENABle bit is set to 1. LIMit register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
Page 770 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System to the order of traces in the response string of the CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? query. ● The number of traces monitored cannot exceed 16. If a setup contains more traces, the newest traces are not monitored.
Page 771 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Receiver overload protection tripped This bit is set if the analyzer detects an excessive input level at one of the ports. If this condition persists, all internal and external generators are switched off.
Page 772 ● Query of the error queue 7.5.4.1 Service Request The R&S ZNB/ZNBT can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually this service request causes an interrupt, to which the control program can react appropri- ately. Initiating an SRQ...
Page 773 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register) 3. Set bit 1 in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1:ENABle register The R&S ZNB/ZNBT generates an SRQ when the event associated with bit 1 of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1:ENABle register occurs, i.e. when any point on the first trace fails the limit check.
Page 774 ® Remote Control R&S ZNB/ZNBT Status Reporting System The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instru- ments connected to the controller. 7.5.4.3 Parallel Poll In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0"...
Page 775 7.5.5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The table below indicates the effects of various commands upon the status reporting system of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT. Event Switching on DCL, SDC...
Page 776 Chapter 8.4, "R&S ZVR/ZVABT Compatible Commands", on page 1353. If you want to make full use of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT features but do not need R&S ZVR compatibility, you should use the commands listed in Chapter 8.3, "SCPI Command Reference", on page 779.
Page 777 The short form consists of all uppercase characters, the long form of all uppercase plus all lowercase characters. It is recommended to use either the short form or the long form; mixed forms are not always recognized. The R&S ZNB/ZNBT itself does not distinguish uppercase and lowercase characters.
Page 778 Event Status Read *IDN? – / query only Queries the instrument identification string of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT, including the manufacturer, the instrument type, its serial number, and the software revision. Identification Query The response is of the form Rohde-Schwarz,ZNB<Max.
Page 779 Wait to continue 8.3 SCPI Command Reference The following sections provide detailed reference information on the instrument con- trol commands implemented by the R&S ZNB/ZNBT network analyzer. ● CALCulate Commands..................780 ●...
Page 780 Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not a global, composite limit check on several traces has failed. Since V2.20 of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT FW the result is automatically recalculated when- ever a relevant setting is changed, i.e. a subsequent query will return the updated limit violation state.
Page 781 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Data format The trace data is transferred in either ASCII or block data (REAL) format, depending on the setting. If block data format is used, it is recommended to FORMat[:DATA] select EOI as a receive terminator...
Page 782 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Return values: <Data> Response values either in ASCII or block data format, depend- ing on the current setting. FORMat[:DATA] Example: Analogous to CALCulate:DATA:DALL?; see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA. Usage: Query only CALCulate:DATA:TRACe <TraceName>, <Format>, <Data>...
Page 783: Calculate:Data:call
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Note ● Importing data is only supported in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>: CONTinuous OFF) ● Before importing data, the channel must be configured with the same settings that were used during export (user calibration, balanced port configuration, stimulus axis etc.).
Page 784: Calculate:Data:channel:all
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CHANnel:ALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all traces of the selected channel. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.
Page 785 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the previously defined S-parameter group. Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see on page 785. CALCulate<Chn>:DATA Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA <Format>, <Data>...
Page 786 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; SWE:POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points, making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1). CALC:DATA? FDAT Query the 20 response values of the created trace. In the FDATa setting, 20 comma-separated ASCII values are returned.
Page 787 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference MDATa Unformatted trace data (see SDATa) after evaluation of trace mathematics. [Data access point 5] NCData Factory calibrated trace data: the values are obtained right after applying the fac- tory calibration but before applying a user-defined calibration (if any).
Page 788: Calculate:Data:nsweep[:Last]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep[:LAST]? <Format>, <RvCount> Reads the response values of a trace acquired in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). The trace can be any of the traces acquired dur- ing the single sweep cycle.
Page 789 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? <Format>, <FwCount>[, <FwCountEnd>] Reads the response values of a trace or a consecutive group of traces acquired in sin- gle sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). Tip: This command can only be used for >...
Page 790: Calculate:Data:stimulus
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:STIMulus? Reads the stimulus values of the active data or memory trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: CALCulate<Chn>:DATA Usage: Query only 8.3.1.3 CALCulate:DLINe... The CALCulate:DLINe... commands control the horizontal line used to mark and retrieve response values (display line).
Page 791 R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.4 CALCulate:DTIMe... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the skew measurement provided with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20..................791 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:DATA? ................791 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL? ............... 792 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP ................792 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:LIMit ................
Page 792 1 – skew check has failed Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Defines whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT should make an audible beep on skew limit viola- tions. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 793 Defines the position of the skew measurement. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <SkewPos> Skew position as integer percentage of the step size Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Skew Position" on page 657 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables the Skew Measurement.
Page 794 Manual operation: "Reference Trace" on page 656 8.3.1.5 CALCulate:EYE... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the eye diagram measurement provi- ded with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20...................795 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:DUT:MODE .............795 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:POST<1|2> ............... 796 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE ................. 796 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:STATe...
Page 795 <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <DUTMode> IDEal | MEASured Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Mode" on page 649 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:POST<1|2> <Weight> Sets the weights of the post-cursor taps for the pre-emphasis FIR filter in the calcula- tion chain of the related eye diagram.
Page 796 <Weight> Weight relative to the "Cursor" tap *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Cursor Settings" on page 645 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE <Weight> Sets the weight of the pre-cursor tap for the pre-emphasis FIR filter in the calculation chain of the related eye diagram.
Page 797: Calculate:Eye:equalization:ctle:pole<1|2
Parameters: <DC Gain> *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "CTLE Equalizer" on page 650 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:CTLE:POLE<1|2> <CTLE Poles> Specifies the poles of the CTLE (a two-pole filter with single zero) used at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram.
Page 798: Calculate:Eye:equalization:state
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "CTLE Equalizer" on page 650 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables the CTLE at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 799: Calculate:Eye:input:bpattern:type
<DataRate> Data rate with units BPS, KBPS (=10^3 BPS), MBPS (=10^6 BPS), GBPS (=10^9 BPS) Default unit: BPS Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Symbol Rate" on page 640 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:BITS <BitLength> Defines the length of a user-defined bit stream to be simulated for the related eye dia- gram.
Page 800 <PrbsLength> L5 | L7 | L9 | L10 | L11 | L13 | L15 Li represents an actual sequence length of 2 - 1. Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Length" on page 639 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:MODulation <PAMType> Defines or queries the modulation type of the signal to be simulated for the related eye diagram.
Page 801 Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <RiseTime> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Rise Time / Rise Time Definition" on page 641 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe:THReshold <RiseThreshold> Selects the appropriate rise time definition for the low pass in the binary signal genera- tor simulation of the related eye diagram.
Page 802 SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <DiracDelta> *RST: 1 ns Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Dirac" on page 647 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:PROBability <DiracProbability> Defines the probability of the Dirac jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 803 Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PeriodicMagnitude> *RST: 1 ns Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Periodic" on page 646 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:PHASe <PeriodicPhase> Defines the phase of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram.
Page 804 <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StdDeviation> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Random" on page 646 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:STATe <Boolean> Activates the jitter functionality in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 805: Calculate:Eye:jitter:periodic:magnitude
R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Dirac" on page 647 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:PERiodic <Boolean> Enables/disables periodic jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 806: Calculate:Eye:jitter:type:user
CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "User Specific" on page 647 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK AUTO Automatically creates an eye mask, based on the current eye measurement settings. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 807: Calculate:Eye:mask:data
<VerticalOffset> Vertical offset relative to the 0 V level, i.e. the Voltage level of the center. Default unit: V Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Center" on page 653 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:DATA? Returns the detailed results of the mask test in the related eye diagram (i.e. the con- tents of the corresponding result info field).
Page 808: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail
Samples Hits ------ Fail Rate ------ Test Result ------ Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 650 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL? Returns 'Pass' or 'Fail' to indicate the result of the limit check in the related eye diagram.
Page 809: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail:beep
"Mask Test On" on page 650 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Defines whether the R&S ZNB/ZNBT should make an audible beep on mask failures in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 810: Calculate:Eye:mask:shape:bottom:state
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Top/Bottom Setup" on page 653 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:HORizontal <Width> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:HORizontal <Width> Defines the width of the bottom/top rectangle in the eye mask of the related eye dia- gram.
Page 811 <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Offset> Default unit: V Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Top/Bottom Setup" on page 653 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE <PolygonType> Defines the shape of the center polygon (octagon, hexagon or rectangle) in the eye mask of the related eye diagram.
Page 812: Calculate:Eye:mask:shape:polygon:vertical
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Polygon Setup" on page 652 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical <Main>[, <Minor>] Defines the main [and minor] height of the center polygon in the mask of the related eye diagram. The...
Page 813: Calculate:Eye:mask:violation:rate
R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 650 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE <ViolationRate> Defines the violation rate (i.e. the share of bad samples) for the mask test in the related eye diagram.
Page 814 'Eye Measurements Eye Minimum,-2.909 V, Eye Maximum,2.997 V, Eye Base,-2.734 V, Eye Top,2.734 V, Eye Mean,0.000 V, Eye Amplitude,5.468 V' Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Display Measurements" on page 636 User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 815: Calculate:Eye:measurement:state
Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Display Measurements" on page 636 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:TTIMe:THReshold <ThresholdEnum| LowerThreshold>[, <UpperThreshold>] Defines the lower and upper threshold that are used to calculate the transition times (rise/fall time) in an eye measurement.
Page 816 Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Active" on page 648 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STATe <Boolean> Defines whether the active trace in the selected channel shall be represented as an eye diagram.
Page 817 R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Encoder" on page 643 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:LOWPass <Boolean> Enables/disables a single pole low pass filter in the binary signal generator simulation of the related eye diagram measurement. The low-pass is defined using its rise time (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:...
Page 818 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:STATe Conversely, if CALCulate1:EYE:VIEW is set to JITTER and subsequently CALCulate1:EYE:JITTer:STATe is turned OFF, the calculation chain is further shortened to the next active building block. Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "[Slider]" on page 642 8.3.1.6 CALCulate:FILTer[:GATE]... The CALCulate:FILTer[:GATE]... commands define the properties of the time gate which is used to optimize the time domain response.
Page 819 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ON CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STATe ON; SHOW ON Activate time domain representation and a time gate in channel no. 1. Display the time gate CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STARt 2ns; STOP 3 Restrict the time gate to the time interval between 2 ns and 3 ns.
Page 820 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CenterTime> Center time of the time gate Range: -99.8999999 s to +99.8999999 s Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: 1.5E-009 s Default unit: s Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON; :CALC:FILT:TIME: STAT ON Reset the instrument and enable the time domain representation and the time gate.
Page 821 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> MAXimum | WIDE | NORMal | MINimum MINimum - Steepest edges (rectangle) WIDE - Normal gate (Hann) NORM - Steep edges (Hamming)
Page 822 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <StartTime> CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <StopTime> These commands define the start and stop times of the time gate, respectively. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StopTime> Start or stop time of the time gate.
Page 823 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:WINDow <TimeGate> Selects the time gate to be applied to the time domain transform. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> RECT | HAMMing | HANNing | BOHMan | DCHebyshev...
Page 824 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ..............829 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:ORDer ..............829 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP ............830 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT ............830 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE ............830 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt ..............830 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN ..............831 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN[:STATe] ............831 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:ATTenuation ............831 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FREQuency ..............831 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe ............832 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:TRACe:COUPling CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:ATTenuation:BEHavior <AttenuationBehavior>...
Page 825 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the cur- rent directory (see MMEMory:CDIRectory) Manual operation: "Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset "...
Page 826 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE), this command loads the proper- ties of the Short coupon from a Touchstone file. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 827 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Can only be set to ON, if a recent version of the ISD tool (from 2019-12 or later) is used. ON correspons to add_dc=1 in the tool's batch mode. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored.
Page 828 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> 1 (ON, true) if the test fixture is connected to port <Ph_pt>, 0 (OFF, false) otherwise Example: Chapter 9.2.8, "Fixture Modeling", on page 1415 Manual operation: "Active" on page 594 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:FTIMe:DUT <FltDutAndLeadIns>...
Page 829 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Operation (fast/acc)" on page 599 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PASSivity <Boolean> Defines whether the ISD tool shall enforce passivity and reciprocity for the test cou- pons and the test fixture. Corresponds to the passive batch mode parameter of the ISD tool.
Page 830 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt Tells the ISD tool which ports (in the measured DUT + Test Fixture file) shall be skip- ped when the tool is run. ● ...:LEFT: skip the ports on the left (according to the port order specified using CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:ORDer)
Page 831 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the deembedding files shall be assigned after the tool has run. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 832 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <FltLeadInScalingTime> Manual operation: "Scaling for Flt Tm" on page 597 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:TRACe:COUPling <TraceCoupling> Tells the ISD tool about coupling among lead-in traces. Corresponds to the coupling batch mode parameter of the ISD tool.
Page 833 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command starts the measurement of the coupon at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[: STATe]). The coupon type can be selected using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>: COUPon:TYPE.
Page 834 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> Physical port number Parameters: <Boolean> 1 (ON, true) if the test coupon is connected to port <Ph_pt>, 0 (OFF, false) otherwise Manual operation: "Active" on page 593 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DIFFcfg <SFDPortConfig> Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the 2x Thru test coupon.
Page 835 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN Runs the SFD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that: ● The test coupon measurement (using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>: COUPon:MEASure) finished successfully, or the test coupon data were success- fully loaded from file (using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:...
Page 836 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT... Commands for Delta-L PCB characterization (see Chapter 5.7.11, "Delta-L 4.0 PCB Characterization", on page 230)..........836 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent? ......... 837 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent:COUNt? ..........837 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:DEFault? ........837 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:DEFault:COUNt? ..........838 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USEDefault ..........838 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER? ........838 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:COUNt?
Page 837: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Frequencies:current
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies" on page 614 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent:COUNt? Returns at how many frequencies the Delta-L algorithm calculates the loss-per-inch uncertainties. to query the list CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent? of frequencies. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored...
Page 838: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Frequencies:user
This suffix is ignored Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) Use default frequencies OFF (0) Use custom frequencies Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies" on page 614 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER? The Delta-L algorithm can calculate the loss-per-inch uncertainties either at default or at custom frequencies (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies: USEDefault).
Page 839: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Frequencies:user:delete:all
Custom frequency Range: The frequency range of the analyzer Default unit: Hz Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies" on page 614 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:DELete:ALL The Delta-L algorithm can calculate the loss-per-inch uncertainties either at default or at custom frequencies (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:...
Page 840 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Clear All 1L Measurements/Clear Selected 1L Measure- ments" on page 617 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:CACHe:CLEar:SELected <String> If the 1-length method is used (CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:METHod M1L), the VNA firmware builds up a cache of coupon measurements (Touchstone files) in the DeltaL\1LMeasurementCache subfolder of the user data folder C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna.
Page 841: Calculate:fmodel:delt:M1L:measure
ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Parameters: <Length> Length in inches Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Length" on page 617 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L:MEASure Measures the full set of S-parameters at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMO Del:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L|M2L|M3L[:STATe]).
Page 842 This suffix is ignored Parameters: <Measurement> SINGleended | BALanced SINGleended Single-ended or balanced analysis BALanced Balanced analysis Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Measurements" on page 613 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:METHod <Method> Selects the Delta-L+ characterization method to be used. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored.
Page 843: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Run
Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Run" on page 617 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:SWEep:CONTrol <SweepControl> Tells the firmware to use either default values for frequency step size and IF band- width, or the settings of the active channel for the Delta-L measurement.
Page 844: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Sweep:control:step
This query returns the resulting frequency step size. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Sweep Control" on page 614 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:SWEep:FREQuency:MAXimum <Frequency> CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:SWEep:FREQuency:MINimum <Frequency> Defines the sweep range of the Delta-L measurement channel. The entered MAXimum and MINimum values are set as [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STOP...
Page 845 ON (1) Use the recommended trace configuration, i.e. display each of the traces in a separate diagram. OFF (0) Display all traces in a single diagram. Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K231 Manual operation: "Trace" on page 615 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD... Commands for Eazy Deembedding (see Chapter 5.7.8, "Eazy De-embedding Based...
Page 846 <Boolean> ON (1) if the test coupon is connected to port <Ph_pt> OFF (0) otherwise Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210 Manual operation: "Active" on page 593 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DCEXtrapolat <Boolean> Defines whether the Touchstone de-embedding file generated by the EZD tool contains data for DC.
Page 847 Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K210 Manual operation: "Run <Fixture Modeling Tool>" on page 595 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:RUN[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the EZD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the deembedding files shall be assigned after the tool has run.
Page 848 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Timestamp Filenames" on page 591 8.3.1.8 CALCulate:FORMat... The CALCulate:FORMat... commands determine the post-processing of the mea- sured data in order to obtain various display formats. CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat <Type> Defines how the measured result at any sweep point is post-processed and presented in the graphical display.
Page 849 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference MLINear Displays |z| in a Cartesian diagram MLOGarithmic Calculates |z| in dB (= 20 log|z|) and displays it in a Cartesian diagram MAGNitude (for compatibility with R&S ZVR ana- lyzers) PHASe Calculates Phase(z) in the range between -180° and +180°...
Page 850 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.9 CALCulate:GDAPerture... The CALCulate:GDAPerture... commands configure the group delay measure- ment. CALCulate<Chn>:GDAPerture:SCOunt <Steps> Defines an aperture for the calculation of the group delay as an integer number of fre- quency sweep steps.
Page 851 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference MAGPhase Averaging of magnitude and phase (default) of the complex trace value REIMag Averaging of real and imaginary part of the complex trace value Manual operation: "Mode" on page 333 8.3.1.11 CALCulate:LIMit...
Page 852 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ..................866 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe ................866 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe:AREA ..............867 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL:ALL? [<RecallSet>] Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the circle limit check has failed for at least one channel in the referenced recall set. 0 represents pass and 1 represents fail Query parameters: <RecallSet>...
Page 853 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U. CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:STATe ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result.
Page 854 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U. CALCulate:FORMat POLar CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay ON Activate a polar diagram and show the circle limit line in the dia- gram.
Page 855 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] <StartStim>, <StopStim>[, ...] Defines the stimulus values of the limit line and/or creates new limit line segments. See also Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 133. Rules for creating segments The following rules apply to an active trace with n existing limit line segments: ●...
Page 856 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt <LimShift> Shifts an existing limit line in horizontal direction. See also Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 133. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Setting parameters: <LimShift>...
Page 857 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 1.5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1.5 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:DATA 1, 1500000000, 2000000000, 2, 3 Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response values of +2...
Page 858 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean> Sets/queries the visibility of the display circle for the active trace of channel <Chn>. The display circle is defined using CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DATA. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 859 Tip: Use to perform a composite (global) limit check. CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? Since V2.20 of the R&S ZNB/ZNBT FW the result is automatically recalculated when- ever a relevant setting is changed, i.e. a subsequent query will return the updated limit violation state.
Page 860 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference – updates even limit line segments 2, 4, ..., 2s with type=lower and the given response values – creates lower limit line segments 2s+2, 2s+4, ..., 2k with (type=lower and) the given response values –...
Page 861 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:FEED <StimulusOffset>, <ResponseOffset>[, <TraceName>] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:FEED <StimulusOffset>, <ResponseOffset>[, <TraceName>] Generates a lower or an upper limit line using the stimulus values of a data or memory trace and specified offset values. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 862 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <LimShift> Response offset value for all limit line segments. Range: Virtually no restriction for limit segments Default unit: NN Example: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:FEED Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Shift Lines" on page 345 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:AMPLitude:STARt <Response>...
Page 863 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent:COUNt? Returns the number of limit line segments, including enabled and disabled segments. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment (segment no. 1) in the stimu- lus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response val-...
Page 864 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Seg> Segment number If you want to use a custom formula for a segment, use to create it. CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] Parameters: <State> OFF (0) The line segment is a straight line, connecting the endpoints specified in the segment definition.
Page 865 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <StimVal> Stimulus value confining the limit line segment. If specified, the unit of a stimulus value must in accordance with the sweep type of the active channel ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep: TYPE). Default units are Hz for frequency sweeps, dBm for power sweeps, and s for time sweeps.
Page 866 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:UPP 0, 0 Define an upper limit line segment across the entire sweep range, using a constant upper limit of 0 dBm. CALC:LIM:SEGM:TYPE LMIN Turn the defined limit line segment into a lower limit line seg- ment.
Page 867 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos> LEFT | MID | RIGHt Horizontal position <VerticalPos> TOP | MID | BOTTom Vertical position Example: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:FAIL? Manual operation: "Limit Check"...
Page 868 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ............872 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe ..............872 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold ............872 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold:STATe ..........873 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe] ........873 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe]:AREA ................873 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:AOFF ................874 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth ............... 875 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:DELTa[:STATe] ..............875 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:EXCursion ............876 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:EXCursion:STATe ................ 876 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FORMat ..........877 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE...
Page 869 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains traces Trc1 and Trc2, assigned to channels no. 1 and 2, respectively. :CALC2:PAR:SEL 'TRC2'; :CALC2:MARK1 ON; MARK2 Select Trc2 as the active trace of channel 2 and activate mark- ers 1 and 2 for it.
Page 870 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" on page 706 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer[:STATe]:AREA <HorizontalPos>, <VerticalPos> Moves the marker info field for the active trace <Chn> to one of nine predefined posi- tions in the active diagram.
Page 871 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference SCPI PHASe "Phase" POLar "Real Imag" COMPlex (for R&S ZVR compatibility) GDELay "Delay" REAL "Real" IMAGinary "Imag" "SWR" LINPhase "Lin Mag Phas"e MLPhase (for R&S ZVR compatibility) LOGPhase "dB Mag Phase" MDPhase (for R&S ZVR compatibility) IMPedance "R + j X"...
Page 872: Calculate:Marker:mpeak:threshold
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference to activate it. CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Value> Minimum peak excursion The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the excursion to a format-specific default value.
Page 873: Calculate:Marker:search:bfilter:result[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Active> Boolean Manual operation: "Threshold Settings" on page 371 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe] <Boolean> Shows or hides the bandfilter search results in the diagram area. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 874 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value. Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK1 ON; MARK2 ON Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to the trace no. 1.
Page 875: Calculate:Marker:Delta[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BWID:MODE BST Select a bandstop filter search. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace. Create markers M1 to M4. CALC:MARK:SEAR:BFIL:RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area.
Page 876: Calculate:Marker:Excursion
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number Parameters: <Value> Minimum peak excursion The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the excursion to a format-specific default value.
Page 877: Calculate:Marker:Function:center
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE <BandfilterType> Selects the bandfilter search mode. In contrast to manual control, bandfilter tracking is not automatically activated. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4.
Page 878: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user[:Range]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] <NumSearchRange> Assigns a search range no. <NumSearchRange> to marker no <Mk> and selects the search range, e.g. in order to display range limit lines or define the start and stop val- ues.
Page 879: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user:start
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <StarSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP <StopSearchRange> These commands define the start and stop values of the search range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe]. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number.
Page 880: Calculate:Marker:Function:execute
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Mode Find... MAXimum Absolute maximum in the search range (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] MINimum Absolute maximum in the search range RPEak Next valid peak to the right of the current marker position LPEak...
Page 881: Calculate:Marker:Function:start
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MARK ON; MARK:DELTa ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and enable the delta mode. CALC:MARK:X 300MHz Increase the stimulus value of the delta marker by 300 MHz.
Page 882 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Mode> CONTinuous | DISCrete CONTinuous - marker can be positioned on any point of the trace, and its response values are obtained by interpolation. DISCrete - marker can be set to discrete sweep points only.
Page 883 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK ON Create the reference marker and marker 1 and assign them to trace no. 1. The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range.
Page 884: Calculate:Marker:Name
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF:MODE DISC CALC:MARK2:REF:MODE CONT Create the reference marker in discrete mode and marker 2 in continuous mode. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK2 ON Display the two markers.
Page 885: Calculate:Marker:Reference:x
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X <StimulusValue>[, <Seg>[, <MeasPoint>]] In NORMal or FIXed marker mode (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE) this command sets or gets the stimulus value of the reference marker. In ARBitrary mode this is only true if the X axis represents the stimulus. For all other trace formats (see CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat) it sets or gets the X position of the reference marker,...
Page 886: Calculate:Marker:Search:tracking
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: REFerence[:STATe] Setting this value is only possible in ARBitrary mode (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:TYPE. For NORMal and FIXed mode markers it is read- only. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 887: Calculate:Marker:Target
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch:FORMat <SearchFormat> Selects the format in which the target value shall be specified (see on page 888). CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARGet Each marker may have a different target format. The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z = x + jy is converted.
Page 888 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose channel 1's selected trace is POLar and marker 1 isn't yet created :CALCULATE1:MARKER1 ON Create/enable Marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:FUNCtion:SELect TARGet Select TARGet search mode for marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:SEARch:FORMat? Query the target format of marker 1. The result is DEF and for polar diagrams the default target format is "Phase".
Page 889: Calculate:Marker:Threshold
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <TargetSearchVal> Target search value of marker no. <Mk>. The value range and reset value depend on the selected target format (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch: on page 887). FORMat Example: CALC:MARK ON Create marker no.
Page 890: Calculate:Marker:Type
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE <Mode> Sets the marker mode for the related marker. The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <Mode>...
Page 891: Calculate:Marker:X
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Marker Mode" on page 363 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X <StimulusValue>[, <Seg>[, <MeasPoint>]] If the mode of the related marker is NORMal or FIXed (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:TYPE), this command sets or gets the marker's stimulus value.
Page 892 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Setting this value is only possible in ARBitrary mode (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:TYPE. For NORMal and FIXed mode markers it is read-only. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...
Page 893 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine <Expression> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine <Expression> Defines a mathematical trace for the active trace, using a string expression. ● The expression in the first command refers to raw, unformatted trace data (complex data). In order to apply it, must be set to CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion...
Page 894 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Type Complete List Description Special Functions StimVal Current stimulus value (see description of operators for User Defined Math) Brackets Priority of operations in complex expressions CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion <Mode> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:FUNCtion <Mode> Defines a simple mathematical trace based on the active trace and its active memory trace.
Page 895 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize Copies the current state of the active data trace to a memory trace. If a mathematical trace is active, the data trace associated with the mathematical trace is copied. The memory trace is named Mem<n>[<Data_Trace>] where <n> counts all data and memory traces in the active recall set in chronological order, and <Data_Trace>...
Page 896 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MATH:MEM Copy the current state of the default trace 'Trc1' to a memory trace named 'Mem2[Trc1]'. The memory trace is not dis- played. CALC:MATH:SDEF 'Trc1 / Mem2[Trc1]' Define a mathematical trace, dividing the complex data trace by the stored complex memory trace.
Page 897 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference .................897 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:ALL ................897 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:MEMory ................897 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? ............... 898 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog:SENDed? ..............898 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup ................899 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete ...............900 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CALL ..............900 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CMEMory ..............900 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:SGRoup ................901 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure ............... 902 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure:SENDed ................902 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine ..............905 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine:SENDed...
Page 898 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S CALC4:PAR:CAT? Query the traces assigned to channel 4. If Ch4Tr1 is the only trace assigned to channel 4, the response is 'CH4TR1,S11'.
Page 899 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference e.g. S for <log_port1> = 1, <log_port2> = 2. If only one logical port <log_port1> is specified, a single trace with the reflection coefficient S is created. <log_port1><log_port1> Trace names The generated traces are assigned the following trace names: <Ch_name>_SG_S<log_port1><log_port1>,...
Page 900: Calculate:parameter:delete:all
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. See "Rules for trace names" in Chap- ter 6.5.1.3, "Trace Manager Dialog", on page 304. Example: CALCulate4:PARameter:SDEFine 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the...
Page 901 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <Ch> may be used to reference a previously defined channel. If <Ch> does not exist, it is generated with default channel settings. Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup Usage: Event CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure <TraceName>, <Result>...
Page 902: Calculate:Parameter:measure
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure:SENDed <TraceName>, <Result> Assigns a measurement result to an existing trace. The query returns the result assigned to the specified trace (no second parameter; see example). Similar to CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure, but in presence of balanced ports this command distinguishes between ●...
Page 903 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, string variable, e.g. 'Trc4'. See "Rules for trace names" in "Table Area" on page 305. Trace names must be unique across all channels and diagrams. If a trace with the selected trace name already exists, the ana- lyzer behaves as follows: If the existing trace is assigned to the same channel as the new trace, it is deleted.
Page 904 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 'A1' | ... | 'A01' | ... | 'B1' | ... | 'B01' | ... Wave quantities A<meas>D1 (for a wave) and B<meas>D1..| 'A1SAM' | 'A1AVG' | 'A1AMP' The strings SAM, AVG, AMP appended to the wave quantities denote a nor- mal (sample, SAM), AVG Real Imag (AVG), or AVG Mag Phase (AMP) detector.
Page 905 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 'IM3UOR' | 'IM3LOR' | 'IM3MOR' | 'IM5UOR' ... Intermodulation product (as explained above) displayed in dB units relative 'IM9MOR' to the measured lower tone level at DUT output ("intermodulation suppres- sion") 'IP3UO' | 'IP3LO' | 'IP3MO' | 'IP5UO' ... 'IP9MO' Intercept point IP<order><side>O where <order>...
Page 906 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S . The trace is the active trace in channel 4. CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr2', 'S22'...
Page 907 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ..................910 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? ..............910 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat ..............911 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent:COUNt? ............911 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] ............... 912 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:LIMit ............912 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult? ..........913 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt ..........913 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP ................914 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SOUNd[:STATe] ..................914 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe ................914 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe:AREA CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] <Enable> Configures the display of ripple check info fields for the active recall set.
Page 908 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain <SweepType> Deletes the existing ripple limit ranges and (re-)defines the physical units of the stimu- lus values of the ripple limit lines. The unit of the ripple limit is defined via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat.
Page 909 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Type> – Boolean identifier for the ripple limit range type. 1 for ripple limit range on (with limit check). 0 for ripple limit range off: The range is defined, but no limit check result displayed. The result is still available via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:...
Page 910 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides all ripple limit lines (including all ranges) associated to the active trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - ripple limit line on or off.
Page 911 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <UnitRef> COMPlex | MAGNitude | PHASe | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | GDELay | L | C Keyword for the physical unit of the response values; dimension- less numerss, relative power, phase, time, inductance, capaci- tance units.
Page 912 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit check on or off. A result is available even if the limit check is disabled; see example for CALCulate<Chn>: RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult?. *RST: n/a (no ripple limit line defined after a reset) Example: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:...
Page 913 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Note: In remote control, the ripple limit check result is calculated once at the end of each sweep. If the ripple limits are changed, a new sweep is required to obtain upda- ted ripple limit check results.
Page 914 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. CALC:RIPP:SEGM:STIM:STAR 1GHZ; STOP 2.5 GHZ; : CALC:RIPP:SEGM:LIM 5 Change the range to a stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2.5...
Page 915 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos> LEFT | MID | RIGHt Horizontal position <VerticalPos> TOP | MID | BOTTom Vertical position Example: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? Manual operation: "Ripple Check"...
Page 916 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:SMO ON Activate smoothing for the default trace. CALC:SMO:APER 0.5 Reduce the smoothing aperture to 0.5 %. Manual operation: "Aperture" on page 331 8.3.1.18 CALCulate:STATistics... The CALCulate:STATistics... commands evaluate and display statistical and phase information of the trace.
Page 917: Calculate:Statistics[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:STAT:MMPT ON Reset the instrument, hiding all statistical results. Display the "Min/Max/Peak-Peak" results. CALC:STAT:MSTD ON Display the "Mean/Std Dev" results in addition.
Page 918: Calculate:Statistics:domain:user
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <EvalRange> Number of the evaluation range. Range: 1 to 10. In addition, 0 denotes the (non-configura- ble) "Full Span" evaluation range. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:STAT:DOM:USER? Query the default evaluation range. The response is zero, i.e.
Page 919: Calculate:Statistics:domain:user:show
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:EPDelay[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MMPTpeak[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDdev[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "Phase/El Length" results, the "Min/Max/Peak- Peak" results, and the "Mean/Std Dev" results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>.
Page 920: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rdomain:user
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 326 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe <PhaseValue> Defines the compression value x for the compression point measurement for phase formatted traces. to retrieve the CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult?
Page 921: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rlevel
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF – reference range limit lines on or off. *RST: Manual operation: "Ref. Range" on page 328 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt <Start> Defines the start value of the range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:...
Page 922: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rphase
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference RANGe – uses the average value in a configurable reference range as the reference value (see CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER) *RST: FPOint Manual operation: "Reference Value" on page 327 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? Returns the compression point of an S-parameter or ratio measured in a power sweep.
Page 923 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Level> Reference level *RST: 1 dB Default unit: dB Manual operation: "Defined Value" on page 328 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RMARker <Marker> Allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small sig- nal value") for the compression point calculation.
Page 924: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference For dB formatted traces, the reference level can be set using CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Phase> Reference phase *RST: 1° Default unit: deg Manual operation: "Defined Value"...
Page 925: Calculate:Statistics:rms[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference SLOPe - return the slope (difference) between two marker val- ues. FLATness - return the flatness of the trace between two marker positions. ALL - return all statistical values, observing the order used above.
Page 926 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "TD-VSWR" on page 319 8.3.1.20 CALCulate:TRANsform... The CALCulate:TRANsform... commands convert measured data from one repre- sentation to another and control the transformation into the time domain (see Chap- ter 5.7.2, "Time Domain Analysis",...
Page 927 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Result> S | Y | Z S-parameters, Y-parameters, Z-parameters Example: *RST; CALC:PAR:MEAS 'Trc1'", '"Y-S22' Select the converted admittance Y <-- S22 as measurement parameter of the default trace.
Page 928 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace. CALC:TRAN:TIME LPAS; TIME:STIM STEP Select a low pass step transformation. CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS KFST Calculate a harmonic grid, keeping the stop frequency and the number of points.
Page 929: Calculate:Transform:complex
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <SidebandSupp> Sideband suppression Range: 10 dB to 120 dB Increment: 10 dB *RST: 32 dB Default unit: dB Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:WIND DCH Reset the instrument and select a Dolph-Chebyshev window for filtering the data in the frequency domain.
Page 930 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep with S measured quantity, and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace. CALC:TRAN:TIME LPAS; TIME:STIM STEP Select a low pass step transformation.
Page 931: Calculate:Transform:time:center
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Usage: Event Manual operation: "DC Value" on page 320 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPFRequency Calculates the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms, keeping the stop frequency and the number of points. Tip: Use if you wish to use one of the CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs...
Page 932 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span" on page 386 Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME: DISTance), then the span is entered in m; the range and default value XAXis changes accordingly.
Page 933: Calculate:Transform:time:start
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus <Type> Selects the type of stimulus to be simulated in the low pass transformation process. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Type> IMPulse | STEP IMPulse - impulse response, in bandpass or lowpass mode.
Page 934 Convert the x-axis scaling to distance units. Manual operation: "Time / Distance" on page 387 8.3.1.21 CALCulate:TRANsform:DTFault... The CALCulate:TRANsform:DTFault... commands set up and control a distance to fault measurement (with option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3)..............935 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DEFine ..............935 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DELete ..............936 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect ..............
Page 935 Defines a new cable type "My cable type" with relative permittiv- ity ε =1.1 and the frequency-dependent attenuation given in the table below. Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 680 Table 8-5: Example: frequency-dependent attenuation table Frequency Attenuation 1 GHz 0.01 dB/m...
Page 936: Calculate:Transform:time:xaxis
CALCulate:TRANsform:DTFault:DELete 'My cable type' Deletes the user-defined cable type "My cable type". Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 680 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect <DtfSelectCable> Selects one of the available (predefined or user-defined) cable types for Distance to Fault measurements.
Page 937 <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Fault Table" on page 681 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:DATA<FaultNo> If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace and DtF limit checking is enabled, this query returns the peak data of DtF limit violation <FaultNo>...
Page 938 *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe ON makes the active trace of channel 1 a DtF trace. CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:STATe ON enables DtF limit checking. Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Fault Limit Check" on page 678 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold <PeakThreshold> If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace, this command allows to set the fault limit for DtF limit checking.
Page 939 "Auto Number of Points calculation". Now SENSe1:SWEep:POINts? returns an increased number of sweep points. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Auto Number of Points" on page 676 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STARt <Start> CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STOP <Stop> Defines the window of the Distance to Fault measurement using its start and stop dis- tance.
Page 940 R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATE ON turns the DtF representation of the active trace of channel 1 ON. Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K3 Manual operation: "Distance to Fault" on page 675 8.3.1.22 CALCulate:TRANsform:VNETworks... The CALCulate:TRANsform:VNETworks... commands define the circuit models for single ended and balanced port (de-)embedding and activate the (de-)embedding function.
Page 941 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram CSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSC Serial Ls, shunt C CSSC Serial Cs, shunt C LSSL Serial Ls, shunt L SLCS Shunt L, serial Cs SCLS Shunt C, serial Ls...
Page 942 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram STSG Serial Touchstone (.s2p) data, shunt C SGST Shunt C, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data GSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSG Serial Ls, shunt C GSSG Serial Cs, shunt C...
Page 943 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Table 8-7: Circuit models for single ended port embedding/deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, generic 2-port (no circuit model) Serial C, shunt L Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C...
Page 944 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Shunt L, serial L SHLC Shunt L, shunt C Serial C, shunt L Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C Shunt C, serial L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial C User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─...
Page 945 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Table 8-8: Circuit models for ground loop port embedding/deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, no circuit model Shunt L Shunt C Shunt C Table 8-9: Circuit models for differential match embedding...
Page 946 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ...................950 PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ..................951 PARameters:R<Cmp> ..952 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition ....952 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................953 C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................954 DATA<Port> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................955 G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................955 L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................956 R<Cmp> ..957 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition...
Page 947 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................972 L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................972 R<1|2|3> .... 973 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:TNDefinition ....... 973 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] ....... 974 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine ....... 975 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................975 C<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................976 L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................976 R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................977 G<1|2|3>...
Page 948 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON - deembedding active OFF - deembedding inactive *RST: Example: *RST; SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; LPOR2 3,4 Define a balanced port configuration.
Page 949 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced: to select the adequate circuit model DEEMbedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition before executing this command. ● to load MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number <Port> Port assignment for two 2-port networks:...
Page 950: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:balanced:deembedding: Parameters:l
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence (high port numbers towards VNA, low port numbers towards DUT) <arg1> <block_data> Content of a Touchstone file (*.s2p or *.s4p) in IEEE488.2 Block Data Format. Usage: Setting only CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>:...

Page 951 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of inductance in circuit model. The total number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L<Cmp> for the specified circuit model.
Page 952: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:balanced:embedding[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ (1E-3 Ω) *RST: 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance. 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit: Ω...
Page 953 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - embedding active or inactive *RST: Example: *RST; SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; LPOR2 3,4 Define a balanced port configuration.
Page 954 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com- TNDefinition mand. ● to load cir- MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt> cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number <Port>...
Page 955 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence (high port numbers towards VNA, low port numbers towards DUT) <arg1> <block_data> Content of a Touchstone file (*.s2p or *.s4p) in IEEE488.2 Block Data Format. Usage: Setting only CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:...
Page 956 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of inductance in circuit model. The total number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L<Cmp> for the specified circuit model.
Page 957: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:differential:embedding
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ (1E-3 Ω) *RST: 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance. 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit: Ω...

Page 958: Parameters:c
PARameters:DATA <Interchange>, <SParamTrcs> Defines a Differential Match Embedding network for a balanced port based on the given S-Parameter traces. MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt> load circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's file system instead. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt>...

Page 959: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:differential:embedding: Parameters:g
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT) IPORts | SGATes Inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) <SParamTrcs>...

Page 960: Parameters:r
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CircuitModel> SHLC Currently only the "Shunt L, Shunt C" lumped element model is supported <Inductance> Range: -1 H to 1 H Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H)

Page 961: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:deembedding[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the deembedding function for ground loops. It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while deembedding is enabled. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <group> Port group (DUT) number.
Page 962 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SC | SG Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-8. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:C? SC Query the default capacitance for ground loop deembedding. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF).
Page 963 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <group> Port group (DUT) number. If multiple port groups are configured (see SOURce<Ch>: GROup<Grp>:PPORts) and CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform: is ON, then each port group can VNETworks:GLOop:GROup have its own de-/embedding models. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop deembedding.
Page 964: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SL | SC Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-8. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop deembedding. The response is 10000000;...
Page 965: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding:Parameters:c
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - Embedding active OFF - Embedding inactive *RST: Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:TND SL Select the Shunt L circuit model for embedding. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R SL, 2.2E+3; :CALC: TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB ON Increase the resistance for the Shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kΩ...
Page 966 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G <CircuitModel>, <Conductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G? <CircuitModel> Specifies the conductance value G in the different circuit models for ground loop embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <group> Port group (DUT) number. If multiple port groups are configured (see SOURce<Ch>:...
Page 967 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop embedding. Range: -1H to 1 H. Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H) Default unit: H Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel>...
Page 968: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:group
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop embedding. The response is 10000000; 0. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R SC, 2.2E+3 Increase the resistance for the Shunt C model to 2.2 kΩ.
Page 969: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:delete
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:FSIMulator[:STATe] <Enable> De/activates the "Fixture Simulator" switch that allows to disable and (re-)enable the configured deembedding, embedding, balanced ports, and port impedance settings for the selected channel. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Enable>...
Page 970: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:Define
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Active" on page 573 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:DEFine <PP_First>,<PP_Second>,<PP_First>,... Creates one or more port pairs for port set deembedding. The command can be used repeatedly to extend or (partially) overwrite the list of port sets for deembedding.
Page 971 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance Ci Range: -1 mF to 1 mF Increment: 1 fF (1E-15 F) *RST: 1 pF (1E-12 F) Default unit: F Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> STSC | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Circuit model whose capacitance C...
Page 972 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L in the different lumped circuit models for port pair deembedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.
Page 973: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <1|2|3> 1|2|3 Index i of the resistance R in the related lumped circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. Parameters: <CircuitModel> STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | LSSL | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | SLLS | GSSL | LSSG | SLGS | SGLS Circuit model whose resistance R...
Page 974: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Define
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the affected port set (see CALCulate<Ch>: TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: DEFine) Parameters: <Boolean> OFF (0): Embedding inactive ON (1): Embedding active *RST: OFF (0) Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB:DEF 1,2,3,4 Define a port pair configuration with port pairs (1,2) and (3,4).
Page 975: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Delete
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 573 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete Deletes all port sets (including port pairs) previously defined for embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> This suffix is ignored Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe]...
Page 976: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Parameters: R<1|2|3
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] Manual operation: "Network" on page 602 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: L<1|2|3> <arg0>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: L<1|2|3>? <arg0> Specifies the inductance value L in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.
Page 977: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Parameters: G<1|2|3
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference In the query form, the <Resistance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the affected port pair (see CALCulate<Ch>:...
Page 978: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Tndefinition
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS. Increment: 1 pS (1E-12 S) *RST: Default unit: Siemens (SI unit symbol: S) Parameters for setting and query: <arg0>...
Page 979: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:deembedding[:State]
Defines an embedding network for a single-ended port based on the given S-Parame- ter traces. ● CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com- TNDefinition mand. ● to load cir- MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's file system. User Manual 1173.9163.02 ─ 55...
Page 980 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Setting parameters: <Interchange> FPORts | IPORts | SGATes FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT)
Page 981 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2? CSC Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C, shunt C cir- cuit model. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF). CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2 CSC, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF.
Page 982 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port deembedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.
Page 983: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:embedding[:State]
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Cmp> Number of resistance in circuit model. The total number of resis- tances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ.
Page 984: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:embedding:Parameters: G
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com- TNDefinition mand. ● to load circuit MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt> data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNB/ZNBT's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Setting parameters: <Interchange>...

Page 985 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding. In the query form, the <Capacitance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model.
Page 986 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference <Cmp> Number of the conductance component in the circuit model. The total number of conductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS.
Page 987 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> CSL | LSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SLL | SHLC | GSL | LSG | SLG | Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-7.
Page 988 8.3.1.23 CALCulate:TTIMe:... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the rise time measurement provided with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20. CALCulate<Chn>:TTIMe:DATA? [<Data>] Queries the results of the rise time measurement Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Query parameters: <Data>...
Page 989 Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON – Rise time measurement enabled OFF – Rise time measurement disabled *RST: Options: R&S ZNB/ZNBT-K20 Manual operation: "Rise Time" on page 655 CALCulate<Chn>:TTIMe:THReshold <ThresholdEnum|LowerThreshold>[, <UpperThreshold>] Defines the lower/upper threshold for the rise time measurement.
Page 990 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ..................990 CONFigure:CHANnel:CATalog? ..............990 CONFigure:CHANnel:MEASure:ALL[:STATe] ..................991 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ..............991 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] ................... 992 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME ................992 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME:ID? ..............992 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:REName ..............993 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:CATalog? ..................993 CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? ..................994 CONFigure:TRACe:WINDow? ................994 CONFigure:TRACe:WINDow:TRACe? ..............995 CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CHANnel:NAME? ..............995 CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CHANnel:NAME:ID?
Page 991: Configure:channel:catalog
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] <Boolean> Creates or deletes channel no. <Ch> and selects it as the active channel. defines the channel name. CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME A channel created using CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON can be configured but has no trace assigned so that no measurement can be initiated. Use <TraceName>, <Result>...
Page 992: Configure:channel:Trace:rename
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME <ChannelName> Assigns a name to channel number <Ch>. The channel must be created before (CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON). Moreover it is not possible to assign the same name to two different channels. returns a list CONFigure:CHANnel:CATalog? of all defined channels with their names.
Page 993: Configure:channel:Trace:catalog
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CONF:CHAN:TRAC:REN 'Testtrace_1' Reset the analyzer to create a default trace in channel 1 and set this trace as the active trace. Rename the trace 'Testtrace_1'. CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Testtrace_2', 'S11' Create a new trace which will become the active trace in chan- nel no.
Page 994: Configure:trace:window:trace
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC2:PAR:SDEF 'Ch2Trc2', 'S11' Create channel 2 and a new trace named Ch2Trc2. CONF:TRAC:CAT? Query all traces and their names. As a default trace no. 1 is cre- ated upon *RST, the response is '1,Trc1,2,Ch2Trc2'.
Page 995: Configure:trace:Channel:name
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Trc2', 'S11' Create a trace named Trc2. CONF:TRAC:WIND:TRAC? 'Trc2' Query the diagram number for Trc2. The new trace is not dis- played, so the response is 0. DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create a diagram no.
Page 996: Configure:trace:Name
® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME <TraceName> Assigns a name to an existing trace number <Trc>. Note that it is not possible to assign the same name to two different traces. returns CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? a list of all traces in the active recall set with their names.
Page 997 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference 8.3.3 CONTrol Commands The Control... commands allow you to configure the following interfaces: ● USER PORT ● Handler I/O connector (Universal Interface, option R&S ZN-B14 / R&S ZNBT-Z14) ● RFFE GPIO Interface (option R&S ZN-B15 / R&S ZN-Z15)
Page 998 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ............1013 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:FREQuency ............1013 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:VOLTage:IO ............1013 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:VOLTage:LOW .............1013 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:VOLTage:HIGH ................. 1014 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA ...............1014 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk ................1014 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO ............. 1015 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:RANGe ............1015 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:RANGe ..............1015 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:RANGe ............1015 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:SHUNt? ............1015 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:SHUNt? ...............1015 CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:SHUNt? ..............1016 CONTrol:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:VOLTage?
Page 999 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference ● The signals are switched on as soon as a measurement (sweep) in a channel with non-zero channel bits is started. They are changed whenever a channel with differ- ent channel bits becomes the measuring channel.
Page 1000 ® Command Reference R&S ZNB/ZNBT SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Port> GPIO port number. If ALL voltages are queried, this suffix is ignored and can be omitted. Query parameters: <ALL> Use ALL to measure the voltages at all GPIO pins. Return values: <Results>...

This manual is also suitable for:

Znbt

R&S ZNB User Manual

Table of Contents

Format[:Data]

Options

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Calculate:parameter:delete:all

Example

Calculate:transform

Table of Contents

Example

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Kits Is

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for R&S ZNB

Summary of Contents for R&S ZNB

This manual is also suitable for:

Table of Contents